Omron Network Card NT31 NT31C User Manual

Cat. No. V062-E1-02  
NT31 and NT31C  
Programmable Terminals  
Setup Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NT31and NT31C  
Programmable Terminals  
Setup Manual  
Revised January 2003  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice:  
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator  
and only for the purposes described in this manual.  
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed  
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-  
age to property.  
DANGER  
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or  
serious injury.  
!
!
!
WARNING  
Caution  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or  
serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or  
moderate injury, or property damage.  
OMRON Product References  
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers  
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.  
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means  
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.  
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-  
thing else.  
Visual Aids  
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of  
information.  
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation  
of the product.  
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.  
OMRON, 2000  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any  
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-  
sion of OMRON.  
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is  
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change  
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no  
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-  
tion contained in this publication.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xi  
xii  
xii  
xii  
SECTION 1  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-6 Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
4
16  
17  
20  
22  
SECTION 2  
Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
25  
26  
29  
SECTION 3  
Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
31  
3-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
32  
35  
36  
37  
39  
47  
SECTION 4  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port . . . . . . .  
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
53  
54  
SECTION 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . .  
85  
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
86  
100  
SECTION 6  
System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . .  
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-13 Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
133  
134  
135  
140  
150  
155  
157  
168  
168  
188  
191  
221  
227  
230  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION 7  
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
7-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
232  
235  
241  
245  
Appendices  
A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
D Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
E Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
247  
255  
259  
265  
267  
269  
271  
273  
275  
277  
283  
F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
H Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
I
J
Relationship between System Program and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Manual:  
This manual describes connecting the NT-series NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals to a PC  
(Programmable Controller) or other host and peripheral devices and the settings required for communica-  
tions and applications. It includes the sections described below.  
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting  
to install and operate the Programmable Terminal.  
Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connec-  
tion, communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the  
PTs.  
Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts  
of PTs, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.  
Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.  
Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.  
Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.  
Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Func-  
tions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also  
explained here.  
Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and  
inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.  
The Appendices provide specifications, dimensions, procedures for using an RS-232C/RS-422A Con-  
vertor Unit, procedures for transporting and storing the PT, information on cable preparation, information  
on the relationship between the system program and hardware, and product lists.  
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in  
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each  
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section  
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Related Manuals:  
Related manuals are listed below.  
The j symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number.  
Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal  
S NT31 and NT31C PT Setup Manual (V062-E1-j, this manual)  
This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and  
peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications.  
The functions and actual operating methods for the NT31 and NT31C PTs are  
provided in the Reference Manual (V064-E1-j).  
Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation  
S NT31/31C/631/631C PT Reference Manual (V064-E1-j)  
This manual is used for any of the following PTs: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and  
NT631C. It describes screen configurations, part functions, host control meth-  
ods, and other application information.  
PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT31 and NT31C PT  
Setup Manual (V062-E1-j).  
Creating and Transferring Screen Data, and Installing the System Program  
S NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.1 Operation Manual (V061-E1-j)  
The screens displayed on the NT31 and NT31C PTs are created with the Support  
Tool and transferred to the PT. This manual describes how to create and transfer  
screen data. It also describes how to download a system program to a PT using  
the System Installer.  
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the  
Support Tool.  
Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON  
S PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j)  
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se-  
ries: Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series. This manual describes the connection  
and setup methods for these controllers.  
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows Version 4.1 is required to connect the  
NT31 and NT31C PTs to these controllers.  
S NT31/NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j)  
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se-  
ries: Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Sie-  
mens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. This manual describes the connection and set-  
up methods for these controllers.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.  
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Ter-  
minal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a  
Programmable Terminal.  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
3
1
Intended Audience  
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-  
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).  
Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.  
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.  
2
General Precautions  
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications  
described in the operation manuals.  
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual  
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation  
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-  
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that  
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult  
your OMRON representative.  
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are  
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the  
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.  
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure  
to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual  
close at hand for reference during operation.  
WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be  
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in  
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult  
with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to  
the above-mentioned applications.  
!
!
WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where  
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch  
applications.  
3
Safety Precautions  
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them  
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and cor-  
rectly.  
Safety Conventions  
andtheir Meanings  
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate  
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT31/31C.  
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information  
related to safety. The instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must  
be observed.  
WARNING  
Caution  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or  
serious injury.  
!
!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or  
moderate injury, or property damage.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
3
WARNING  
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any  
internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of  
these may result in electrical shock.  
WARNING  
Switch OFF the NT31/NT31C power before replacing the  
backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF  
the power supply.  
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high  
temperatures.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 1  
General  
This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communica-  
tion methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs.  
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-6 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4-2 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4-3 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5-1 Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-6 Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
9
11  
16  
16  
17  
17  
17  
18  
18  
20  
20  
20  
21  
21  
22  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-1  
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C  
The NT31/NT31C is a sophisticated display unit (programmable terminal) which  
automatically displays information and can also be used for operations when  
necessary. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of  
the NT31/NT31C for those using a programmable terminal (PT) for the first time.  
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site  
Production Line Status  
Monitoring  
The NT31/NT31C displays real-time information about the system and equip-  
ment operating status, etc. Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and  
other visuals, making the displays easy to understand.  
Production Control (3)  
Product  
Today’s target  
560  
305  
2
441  
275  
8
Current production  
Number defective  
Number repaired  
7
15  
% achieved  
Directions to Workers on  
the Shop Floor  
The NT31/NT31C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the ap-  
propriate remedial action.  
Alarm  
Assembly line B  
Positioning pin  
is defective. Line stopped.  
Check the following.  
1. Defective pin L3  
2. Position of dog M2  
3. Mounting of photosensor P5  
Panel Switch Functions  
Setting touch switches on the NT31/NT31C allows workers to use the  
NT31/NT31C as an operating panel; the results of the operations are trans-  
mitted to the host.  
Electroplating control  
Corr. prv.  
head  
Electr. Wash.  
Transport  
head  
head  
Clamp  
Unclamp  
Adv.  
Rev.  
Corr.  
prv.fluid  
Electro-  
lyte  
Int. stop  
Wash  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-1  
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C  
Displays Screens  
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer us-  
ing the Support Tool and stored in the NT31/NT31C. The screen data can be  
displayed on the NT31/NT31C in response to instructions from the host or touch  
switch operation.  
Host  
The screen data designated by  
instructions from the host or touch  
switch operation is displayed.  
Receives Data from a  
Host  
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and re-  
ceive necessary data from the host.  
Host link, NT link  
Host  
Sends Data to a Host  
Data input using the touch panel (switch ON/OFF statuses, numeric values,  
character strings) can be transmitted to the host.  
Host  
Touch panel  
ON/OFF information, numeric  
data, etc.  
Screen Data  
The screen data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C can be created on a per-  
sonal computer using the Support Tool. Connect the NT31/NT31C to the per-  
sonal computer with an RS-232C cable and transmit the screen data to the  
NT31/NT31C.  
Create screen data.  
RS-232C  
Personal  
computer  
(Support Tool)  
Screen data  
When the host is connected at serial port A,  
the personal computer is only connected  
when communicating screen data between  
the NT31/NT31C and Support Tool.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
The NT31/NT31C has the following features.  
1-2-1 Features  
Downsized Body  
Slim body (50 mm or less in the panel*).  
The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not  
protrude from the unit.  
* When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness (page 32).  
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment  
The panel is an STN monochrome LCD type with backlight for the NT31 and an  
STN color LCD type with backlight for the NT31C.  
The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site.  
Waterproofed equivalent to the NEMA4 standard and to IP65F*.  
* The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long  
periods.  
320 dots  
POWER  
RUN  
240 dots  
Wide angle of visibility  
Touch Switch Operation  
Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations.  
Compatibility with Other PTs  
There is upward compatibility between the NT31/NT31C and the following  
models for screen data and user programs: NT11S, NT20S, NT30, NT30C,  
NT600S, NT610G, NT610C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631. (Af-  
ter being read to the Support Tool, screens must be modified in accordance  
with the screen size. Depending on the function used, partial modification of  
programs may also be necessary. For details on the compatibility of screen  
data, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Ref-  
erence Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual.  
The dimensions of the panel cut-out to accommodate the NT31/NT31C are the  
same as for the NT30/NT30C.  
Two Ports Featured as Standard:  
Port A for Common Use by Support Tool/Host and Port B for Exclusive Use by the Host  
Communication with the host is possible via another port while connected to  
the Support Tool.  
Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port  
while communicating with the host.  
Rapid System Program & Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit  
Installing a memory unit (type NT-MF261) on the rear of the NT31/NT31C  
makes it easy to write screen data into the NT31/NT31C on site. This enables a  
rapid response to setup changes.  
NT31/NT31C can store a system program into a memory unit. This enables the  
system to handle more flexible setups.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
Screen Data Check  
Function  
Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT31/NT31C system  
menu, without connecting up to the Support Tool.  
Increased Screen Data  
Capacity  
The data capacity of 1 MB is twice that of the NT30/NT30C, enabling storage of a  
larger quantity of screen data.  
Large Increase in  
Maximum Number of  
Registered Elements  
The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been consid-  
erably increased, making it possible to create more expressive screens. For de-  
tails, refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the  
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.  
Binary Data can be Read  
to/Written from the Host  
It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the  
NT31/NT31C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unneces-  
sary, reducing the load on the host.  
Character Display Using  
High Definition Fonts  
Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high-definition font.  
Simple Version Upgrades  
By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (Type NT-  
ZJCAT1-EV4), the system program at the NT31/NT31C can be changed easily  
from a personal computer.  
Complies with  
International Standards  
The NT31/NT31C meets UL/CSA standards and EC directives.  
Compatible with Other  
Vendors’ Devices  
Compatible with Sequencers in the following series: Mitsubishi A-series (Calcu-  
lator Link) and FX-series (Programming Console), Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Se-  
ries, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Se-  
ries. Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT31/NT31C  
to be controlled from other companies’ Sequencers.  
Multiple Windows  
Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen. A  
9-word window control area has been allocated to the host; the contents of these  
9 words can be changed from the Host to open, close, and move windows.  
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C  
Two NT31 models — the NT31, which is capable of versatile graphic displays,  
and the NT31C, which is also capable of color display — are available. The dif-  
ferences between the NT31 and NT31C are tabled below:  
Function  
Type  
NT31  
NT31C  
NT31-ST121-EV2 (Beige)  
NT31-ST121B-EV2 (Black)  
NT31C-ST141-EV2 (Beige)  
NT31C-ST141B-EV2 (Black)  
Display panel STN monochrome LCD display  
type (with white backlight)  
STN color LCD type  
(with white backlight)  
Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT31/NT31C types.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions  
The V2 versions of NT31/NT31C are supplemented and enhanced by the fol-  
lowing functions.  
High-speed 1:N NT Link  
The V2 versions are compatible with the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as the  
earlier standard 1:N NT Link.  
Additional Mathematical  
Functions  
Operands (values referenced by formula) can be registered to allow the PT to  
perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations to  
numeral memory tables or words in the host.  
Device Monitor Function  
Interlock Function  
The new device monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating  
mode or display/change values in the PC’s memory areas. The present values  
(PVs) of several words can be listed with the device monitor.  
PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PC if interlock bits have been  
allocated in the PC for the corresponding PT touch switches, numeric inputs, or  
string inputs.  
Improved Lamp/Touch  
Switch Labels  
The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels:  
Display several lines of labels.  
Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON.  
Display the numeral memory table contents as labels.  
Display the string memory table contents as labels.  
NT30/NT30C and  
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C  
Emulation  
The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area  
can be set to emulate those of the NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C;  
this mode is called NT30/620 compatible mode.  
When the PT is operating in NT30/620 compatible mode, it will be equivalent to  
an NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C in the functions listed below. The  
PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below.  
Refer toAppendix C in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Termi-  
nal Reference Manual for more details.  
Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status  
notify area  
Image/library codes  
Insertion of image/library data into character strings  
Additional CS1 Data  
Areas Accessible  
Data areas in CS1 PCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed. The  
data areas listed below can be accessed (read/written).  
All banks in the EM area, timer completion flags (TU), counter completion  
flags (CU), Work areas (WR), Task flags (TK), and the HR area.  
Recipe Function  
You can set the data (numeric values) for multiple words in record units using the  
tabular elements on the PT screen, and write these settings in a single operation  
to words on the host (i.e., PC or PT memory) using a touch switch operation on  
the PT Unit. Also, multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in  
one operation. In this way, groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT  
Unit, and written to or read from the host.  
Adjusting Contrast and  
Brightness During PT  
Operation  
You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the  
touch switch or commands from the host, even while the PT is in operation.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C  
Item  
Support Tool used  
NT30/NT30C  
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 or NT-ZA3AT-EV2  
On rear of unit  
NT31/NT31C  
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4  
DIP switches  
None (software settings)  
Not possible  
Use of B7A unit  
Use of memory unit  
RS-232C interface  
Possible  
Not possible  
Possible  
Connector (9-pin) also used as port for - Serial port A connector (also used  
screen data transfer.  
for screen data transfer, 9-pin)  
- Serial port B connector (for host  
communications only, 25-pin)  
RS-422A/485 interface  
Terminal block  
Serial port B (25-pin D-SUB connector)  
Replacement backlight  
NT30-CFL01/NT30C-CFL01  
NT31C-CFL01 (common use)  
NT31/NT31C system program data  
NT-ZS3AT-EV1  
(including system installer)  
The system installer and system pro-  
gram data are supplied with the Sup-  
port Tool.  
1
High-speed 1:N NT Link  
Not possible  
Possible*  
Memory Link  
System program Exclusive use by Memory Link  
Same as OMRON connection  
Exclusive use by Memory Link  
By touch panel operation  
By touch panel operation  
Maximum of 3999  
Screen data  
Shared with OMRON connection  
By a control on the rear of the unit  
Not possible  
LCD contrast adjustment  
Backlight brightness adjustment  
Number of user-registered screens  
Maximum of 2000  
Screen data capacity*2  
(User program memory)  
Numeral string data  
512 KB  
1 MB  
Maximum of 1000  
Maximum of 1000  
256  
Maximum of 2000  
Maximum of 2000  
Maximum of 1000  
Character string data  
Bit data  
Mathematical tables  
None  
256 max.  
Calculations can be executed  
automatically in the PT.  
*1  
*3  
Image data  
Library data  
Maximum of 224  
Maximum of 4095  
*3  
Maximum of 896  
Maximum of 12288  
Method for storing numeric values  
(numeral memory data and PT status  
control area)  
Fixed as BCD (binary coded decimal)  
Selectable from BCD (binary coded  
decimal) or binary  
3
PT status control area size  
PT status notify area size  
Window control area size  
Registering continuous screen  
4 words  
3 words  
None  
5 words (partial change of contents)*  
3
2 words (partial change of contents)*  
9 CH*2  
Possible  
Not possible (Use a screen switchover  
as a substitute.)  
*1  
Lamp/Touch switch labels  
Fixed display (1 line only)  
- Multiple lines can be displayed  
*1  
- ON/OFF switching is possible  
*1  
- Numeral display is possible  
*1  
- Character string display is possible  
Interlock function  
None  
Operations can be disabled from the  
PC by allocating interlock bits to the  
corresponding touch switch, numeral  
*1  
input, or character string input.  
*1  
Device monitor function  
Not possible  
Possible  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
Item  
Recipe function  
NT30/NT30C  
NT31/NT31C  
None  
---  
Possible  
Accessible CS1 PC data areas  
The data areas listed below can be  
accessed in addition to the data areas  
accessible with the NT30/NT30C.  
*5  
- EM banks (EM_0 to EM_C)  
- Timer completion flags (TU)  
- Counter completion flags (CU)  
- Work areas (WR)  
- Task flags (TK)  
- HR area  
*1: These functions are available only in V2 versions of the NT31/NT31C.  
*2: This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.  
*3: The values are the same as the NT30/NT30C when the PT is in NT30/620 compatible mode.  
*4: The window control area can be used only in the Vj versions of the NT31/NT31C.  
For differences in programming, refer to Appendix B in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Refer-  
ence Manual.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 1-2  
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C  
The following are the principal functions of the NT31/NT31C.  
Functions relating to data display  
Character display  
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse  
video. High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged.  
Graphic display  
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, circular arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed. They can  
also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.  
Memory data display  
The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed. The  
contents of memory tables can be changed from the host.  
Graph display  
Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs, trend graphs, and analogue meter graphs can be  
displayed using numeral memory tables  
Lamp display  
Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to display different  
graphics in the ON and OFF states.  
Alarm list/history display  
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit. The time  
and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed.  
Functions relating to data output  
Buzzer  
A built-in buzzer can be sounded.  
Screen printing  
A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer  
connected to the NT31/NT31C.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Functions relating to data input  
Input by touch switches  
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.  
The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display.  
Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated.  
Pop-up window function  
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch.  
In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set inside the  
window. A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously. Since the window need only be opened when input is required,  
the screen can be used efficiently.  
Numeral/character string setting function  
Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at the  
operation site.  
The input data is written to numeral/character string memory tables and also sent to the host. It is also possible to disable input by control  
from the host.  
Recipe function  
Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host in one operation.  
Input from a bar code reader  
Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field.  
Functions relating to communication  
Communications with the host  
The NT31/NT31C can communicate with the host by four methods: host link, 1:1 NT Link, 1:N NT link (standard or high-speed), and  
Memory link. Data can be read from the host, and data input by means of touch switches and numeral/character string settings can be  
sent to the host. It is also possible to connect with other model PCs.  
Functions relating to the system  
System menu  
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.  
Creation of screen data  
Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built-in screen data memory.  
Resume function  
The status and memory table contents of the NT31/NT31C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while operation is  
stopped, or while the power is off, and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted.  
Screen saver function  
This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen.  
Clock function  
The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data.  
Programming Console function  
The PT can perform the same operations as a C200H-PR027-E Programming Console when the PT is connected to a CPM1, CPM2A,  
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, or SRM1 PC in a 1:1 NT Link connection, or a CS1G/CS1H PC in a 1:N NT Link con-  
nection.  
Device Monitor function  
When the PT is connected to a PC in a 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link, the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PC’s operat-  
ing mode, displaying or changing the PVs of words, or reading the error log.  
System program install function  
The system program of the NT31/NT31C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (NT-  
ZJ3AT1/ZJCAT-EV2). It can also be installed by using a memory unit (NT-MF261).  
Screen display history function/alarm history function  
The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are displayed.  
The alarm history function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times they are turned ON.  
Trend graph logging function and background function  
Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the record can be  
maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed (background function).  
Mathematical function  
This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table has been set in screen data.  
Arithmetic operations, bit operations, logic operations, and comparison operations can be performed. Operations with up to 5 terms are  
possible.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
1-2-6 Displays  
The NT31/NT31C can display various kinds of elements such as characters, nu-  
meric values, graphs, lamps, and touch switches, on a screen. The screen data  
displayed by the NT31/NT31C are created by using the Support Tool at a per-  
sonal computer.  
Characters  
(fixed display)  
Restart  
Stop  
Touch switches  
Characters  
Line 1 Status  
Machine name: NT31C-ST141  
Production qty.: 137 units  
(character string display)  
Numeric values  
(numeral display)  
Bar graph  
25%  
0%  
50%  
100%  
Lamps  
Check 1  
Check 2  
Stage 1  
Stage 2  
Fixed Displays  
Characters and various graphics (circles, circular arcs, sectors, polylines, poly-  
gons and rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and mark  
data, image data, and library data that has already been registered, can be writ-  
ten directly onto the screen.  
Circle  
Arc  
Sector  
Polyline  
Polygon  
Rectangle  
* A continuous straight line with  
up to 256 points can be drawn.  
* A polygon with up to 255  
vertices can be drawn.  
Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters.  
They can be used as custom characters within character strings.  
Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are regis-  
tered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on  
the screen.  
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.  
There is a two-color mode, in which the display color and background color of the  
image are specified when it is registered in a screen, and an eight-color mode in  
which colors are assigned to the image in advance.  
Since image data is composed of dots, it requires a large data size but offers  
great powers of expression.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single  
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be dis-  
played at any position on the screen.  
Since it is generated by combining graphics, library data has a small data size.  
Mark Image data Library data  
Lamps  
These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states  
of bits at the host. Squares, circles, sectors and polygons can be used for lamps  
(normal (standard) lamps). In accordance with the status of the host bit, they can  
be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation between nor-  
mal and reverse video display states).  
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states of  
the host bit (such lamps are called image/library lamps).  
There are four standard lamp labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF  
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.  
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are  
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.  
Normal (Standard) Lamps  
ON  
ON  
Host  
Unlit state  
Lit state  
Image Library Lamps  
ON  
Host  
Unlit state  
Lit state  
Touch Switches  
These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch switch  
on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects:  
Notification to a host bit (input notification function)  
Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)  
Input of a numeric value or character string (input key function)  
Copying of a numeric value or character string (copy key function)  
Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field (cursor moving  
key function)  
Obtaining a hard copy of the screen (screen print function)  
Opening / Closing a window  
Moving a window  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a  
host bit in the same way as lamps.  
The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches: Stan-  
dard, shadow, 3-dimension, no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector  
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area  
within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the touch switch area) can  
be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set.  
When this  
Shown  
position is  
Touch  
switch area  
in  
pressed...  
reverse  
video  
Display  
frame  
Function executed  
There are four touch-switch labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF  
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.  
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are  
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.  
Numeral Displays  
Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed. The dis-  
played numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral  
memory tables.  
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.  
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integral part and  
fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance.  
String Displays  
Numeral Inputs  
Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed.  
The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in  
the character string memory tables.  
Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input nu-  
meric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the  
host.  
Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit  
has been allocated.  
12345678  
7 8 9  
4 5 6  
1 2 3  
"
Input  
0 .  
Window  
String Inputs  
Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches, bar code read-  
ers, etc. The input character strings can also be stored in a character string  
memory table and notified to the host.  
String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit  
has been allocated.  
Character string setting input field  
Display  
NT31C  
Input  
NT31C NT31  
NT631C  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Thumbwheel Switches  
Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with  
the corresponding touch switch (+, –). The input numeric values can also be  
stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host.  
Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an  
interlock bit has been allocated.  
Graphs  
These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric val-  
ues stored in numeral memory tables. There are the following four types.  
Bar Graphs  
Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a  
percentage within the range –100% to +100% of a preset value.  
60%  
Analog Meters  
Analogue meters display, using a quarter, half, or full circle shape, the present  
value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range  
–100% to +100% of the preset value. Users can choose from moving pointer  
type and filling area type displays. Users can also add graduation to the graph.  
60%  
Broken Line Graphs  
Broken line graphs display, in an easy-to-read form, a sequence of numeral  
memory table values converted to a percentage within the range –100% to  
+100% of a preset value.  
100%  
0%  
Example showing a series of 11  
numeral memory table values  
(with a check mark set for the  
display sign)  
100%  
Trend Graphs  
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory  
table, converting the value to a percentage within the range –100% to +100% of  
a preset value. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.  
Past data can also be recorded, and the numeral memory table can be read  
(sampled) even while the trend graph is not being displayed.  
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data, by  
pressing touch switches.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Alarm List/History  
The alarm list/history function displays messages in list form, or graphics  
(image/library data), in accordance with changes in bit memory table statuses.  
For the alarm list, a series of bit memory tables are monitored, and messages  
(contents of character string memory tables) set for bit memory tables that come  
ON are displayed.  
For the alarm history, bit memory tables for which the history property is set are  
continually monitored, and the time when they come ON and number of times  
they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message (charac-  
ter string) set for the bit memory table.  
The NT31/NT31C allows selection of the display order as the newest record first  
or the oldest record first by memory switch setting.  
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present  
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms  
occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred.  
Alarm List  
Message (character string table No. 32)  
set for bit memory table No. 14  
No.13  
Character string table No. 50  
Image/library data 1002  
Bit  
HOST  
1(ON)  
Character string table No. 32  
A000000  
L001003  
D010015  
0
1
0
No.14  
No.15  
Character string table No. 32  
Image/library data 113C  
Character string table No. 54  
Image/library data 1125  
Image/library  
data 113C  
When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library  
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.  
Alarm History  
Message (character string table No. 13)  
set for bit memory table No. 24  
Recorded data  
Character string table No. 11  
Image/library data 005F  
Bit memory table No. 24  
97/12/04 11:19:20  
No. 22  
Character string table No. 13  
Character string table No. 12  
No. 23  
Bit memory table No. 23  
97/12/04 11:25:12  
Character string table No. 12  
Image/library data 102A  
Image/library  
data 102B  
Character string table No. 13  
Image/library data 102B  
No. 24  
When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library  
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.  
Recipe  
You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format, and write it  
to the host. You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and  
display it on the PT screen.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-3  
1-3 System Configuration  
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT31/NT31C. For  
details on product models, refer to Appendix J Model List (page 277).  
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected  
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT31/NT31C.  
Host  
Controls the NT31/NT31C as required while controlling machines and  
monitoring the production line.  
Host Link: C series, CVM1/CV series PC, SRM1  
Can be connected to CPU units, host link units, and SRM1. However,  
connection is not possible to some models of CPU unit and SRM1 (pages 54  
and 101).  
Bar code reader  
Bar codes can be read  
as character strings.  
NT Link: CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CQM1, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE),  
CVM1/CV series PCs, SRM1  
RS-232C cable  
(max. 15 m)  
or  
Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1. However, connection is notpossible  
to some models (pages 67, 72, 111 and 113).  
RS-422A/485 cable  
(max. 500 m)  
Memory Link: Can be connected to a personal computer, FA computer, etc.  
Other companies’ PCs can also be connected.  
Personal computer  
Printer  
For printing out the  
currently displayed  
NT31/NT31C screen.  
Running Windows 95/98/NT  
Support Tool  
Used to create screens for the  
NT31/NT31C at the personal  
computer and transmit them to the  
NT31/NT31C, and to make  
NT31/NT31C settings.  
System installer  
Used to change the system  
program of the NT31/NT31C.  
Memory unit  
Can store screen data  
and system program to  
be read out  
NT31/NT31C  
Displays production line monitoring and  
instructions to the operation site, and  
notifies the switch ON/OFF status and  
numeric value inputs to the host.  
automatically at startup.  
When a 1:N NT Link is being used, up to  
8 PTs can be connected to a single PC.  
Bar code reader (page 37)  
Recommended printers (page 36)  
It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (us-  
ing the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol), and printers that comply with  
one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or  
ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome).  
Memory unit (pages 39 and 47)  
NT-MF261 (made by OMRON)  
Support Tool (page 35)  
NT-series Support Tool Version 4.0 for Windows (Made by OMRON)  
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 (CD-ROM version)  
System installer (page 35)  
System installer (made by OMRON)  
The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support  
Tool (NTZJCAT1-EV4).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications with the Host  
Section 1-4  
Reference: The following optional devices are available. All of them can be used either with  
NT31 or NT31C.  
Replacement backlight  
NT31C-CFL01  
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet NT30-KBA04  
Chemical-resistant cover  
Replacement battery  
NT30-KBA01  
3G2A9-BAT08  
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host  
The NT31/NT31C has the following two communication ports.  
Serial port A:  
D-SUB 9-pin connector  
For RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code readers can be con-  
nected here.)  
Serial port B:  
D-SUB 25-pin connector  
For RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (Selectable by memory switch)  
(The Support Tool and bar code readers cannot be connected here.)  
The host can be connected at either of these two ports.  
The connection methods for each communication method at the PT and host  
sides are indicated below. Make the settings in accordance with the communica-  
tion method that can be used with the PC to be connected and the conditions at  
the operation site.  
Reference: When using an RS-232C/422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) with the host link or NT  
link (1:1) communication method, RS-485 cannot be used. The connection must  
be made with RS-232C or RS-422A.  
1-4 Communications with the Host  
The NT31/NT31C is connected to the host by one of the following communica-  
tion methods.  
The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PC:  
Host link  
1:1 NT Link  
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)  
The following communications can be used to connect another companies’ PC  
or FA computer:  
Communications protocol supported by the other company’s PC  
Memory link  
In all of these communication methods that can be used with NT31/NT31C, data  
communication with host is by direct connection (Memory link is, however, a  
quasi-direct connection).  
In the following, the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will  
be discussed. Memory links will be explained in 1-5 Communications Using  
Memory Links.  
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function  
With the NT31/NT31C, the bits and words referring to data required for display,  
and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PC memory  
area.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications with the Host  
Section 1-4  
The NT31/NT31C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and  
words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen, control the  
PT operating status, and notify statuses to the host.  
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits with-  
out using a PC program is called the direct connection function.  
The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words  
and allocated bits.  
The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the  
NT31/NT31C to be read from the memory area in the PC and written to memory  
tables in the NT31/NT31C. Also, the data input at the NT31/NT31C can be writ-  
ten to the memory area in the PC. The NT31/NT31C screen can be changed in  
accordance with statuses in the PC memory area, and the NT31/NT31C’s status  
data can be written to the PC’s memory area.  
NT31/NT31C  
PC  
DM area  
I/O relay area  
Auxiliary relay area Timers/counters  
Features of the Direct  
Connection Function  
The direct connection function has the following features.  
The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction informa-  
tion and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area  
of the PC memory.  
Since the NT31/NT31C can directly refer to PC bit and word data without using  
the program at the PC, it can be connected to the PC without changing the PC  
program which controls the currently running production line.  
The area to control and notify the NT31/NT31C statuses, including display  
screens, display/no display status, and buzzer output, can be freely allocated  
to any part of the PC data area. This means that the PC status can be read and  
controlled just by reading this area at the PC side, without preparing a special  
communication program.  
The direct connection function allows the NT31/NT31C to directly read and write  
almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the  
NT31/NT31C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PC so that  
its program development efficiency is improved.  
1-4-2 Host Link  
1-4-3 NT Link  
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of the  
host are read and displayed by host link communication. This method can be  
used for connection to the majority of PC types.  
NT link is a method for high-speed communication with a PC using the direct  
connection function. The PCs that can be connected with the NT link are as fol-  
lows.  
When using the built-in host link function of a CPU unit or SRM1:  
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,  
CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CVM1/CV-series PC (-EV1 or later version), SRM1  
Besides the 1:1 NT Link method, in which one PC is connected to one PT, the  
NT31/NT31C can also use the 1:N connection NT Link method, which allows a  
maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PC port.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications with the Host  
Section 1-4  
PCs that can be connected with the 1:N connection NT Link method are as fol-  
lows: CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1).  
The NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link that pro-  
vides faster 1:N communications. The only PCs that support the high-speed 1:N  
NT Link are the -EV1 and higher versions of the CS1G/CS1H PCs.  
In the following sections, the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link commu-  
nication method in general, the term 1:1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to  
NT Links with a 1:1 connection, and the term 1:N NT Link is used to refer to both  
standard and high speed NT Links with 1:N connections. When necessary, the  
standard 1:N NT Link is distinguished from the high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
Features of the NT Link  
The NT link has the following features.  
High-speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed. The  
NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible.  
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allo-  
cated to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).  
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits of  
words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other pur-  
poses.  
The NT link can be used even when the PC is in the RUN mode. (When the host  
link method is used, the NT31/NT31C switches to the monitor mode when the  
PC is in the RUN mode.)  
In the case of PTs that support the standard 1:N NT Link (NT20S, NT31,  
NT31C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C) up to 8 PTs  
can be connected to one port of the PC and used at the same time. Up to 8 PTs  
(NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C) can also be connected simultaneously  
when the high-speed 1:N NT Link is being used.  
All of the PTs connected to a PC port must use either the standard or high-  
speed 1:N NT Link; the two communications systems cannot share a single  
port.  
When using a C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PC and standard 1:N NT Links, up to  
three 1:N NT Link systems (i.e., 24 PTs) can be connected by installing a com-  
munication board in the option slot of the CPU. (Only the standard 1:N NT Link  
can be used.) For details on the Communications Board, refer to the SYSMAC  
Communications Board Operation Manual (W304-E1-j).  
When using a CQM1H PC and standard 1:N NT Links, multiple 1:N NT Link  
systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the  
Inner Board slots. For details on the Serial Communications Board, refer to the  
CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual (W365-E1-j).  
When using CS1G or CS1H PC, multiple 1:N NT Link systems (standard or  
high-speed) can be connected by installing a Serial Communications Board in  
the INNER Board slot or installing a Serial Communications Unit in the Back-  
plane. For details on the communication board/communication unit, refer to  
the CS1-series Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual  
(W336-E1-j).  
If the PC used supports the Programming Console function, the NT31/NT31C  
can be used as a Programming Console.  
If the PC being used supports the Device Monitor function, the NT31/NT31C  
can be used to change the PC’s operating mode and read/change data in the  
PC’s memory areas.  
The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT31/NT31C screen data and  
PC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used with  
the NT link method as they are.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Using Memory Links  
Section 1-5  
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PCs  
Installing a system program for multi-venders by using a specific system installer  
enables the NT31/NT31C to be connected to the PCs of other models in direct  
connection. This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool (NT-  
ZJCAT1-EV4).  
Compatible PC  
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the following model PCs.  
Mitsubishi A series programmable controller (computer link module)  
Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller  
SLC 500 Series by Allen-Bradley  
90-20 and 90-30 Series by GE Fanuc  
S7-300 and S7-400 Series by Siemens  
For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PCs, refer to the PC  
Connection Manual or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual.  
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links  
In this section, a communication method other than the direct connection, called  
the memory link, is discussed.  
1-5-1 Memory Link  
Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer  
or a FA computer and the NT31/NT31C by using RS-232C/422A communica-  
tion.  
In memory link, there is an area called PT Memory, as shown below, inside the  
NT31/NT31C, and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PC. This allows PT  
memory and the display elements of the NT31/NT31C to make a quasi-direct  
connection. By sending a command for the memory link, the host can make the  
NT31/NT31C execute processes through PT memory. Frequently used com-  
mands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table,  
character-string memory table, and bit memory table.  
NT31/NT31C  
PT  
PC  
PT memory  
Numeral  
memory  
table  
Lamp  
Direct connection  
RS-232C/422A  
communication  
In the memory link method, the only difference is that the NT31/NT31C finds its  
communication target inside instead of outside. In the memory link method,  
therefore, change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the  
exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection. (With the  
NT31/NT31C, the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen data  
for the memory link.)  
When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods, the  
memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions,  
as described below.  
The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used.  
The following strobes of PT status notify bits does not turn on (page 7 to 27).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Using Memory Links  
Section 1-5  
Screen switching strobe  
Numerals input strobe  
Character-string input strobe  
The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only.  
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link  
The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are as  
follows:  
In the memory link method, the communication with the host should be carried  
out by using commands. Compared to the ordinal direct connection, which can  
be used requiring almost no programs, the memory link method requires a pro-  
gram that is necessary for interchange of commands. This, however, gives ad-  
vantages to the memory link method by using a large variety of functions avail-  
able in the direct connections from major models such as a personal computer  
and a FA computer equipped with RS-232C/RS-422A communication means,  
allowing the PT to be suited for larger usage.  
Actual PCs have many kinds of areas, where as PT memory is a single area  
with only one kind. When creating screen data by using the memory link meth-  
ods, it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory.  
For communication between the host and the PT by the memory link method and  
for handling screen display elements, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C  
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.  
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function  
When memory link communications are being used, the NT31/NT31C can be  
switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT31/NT31C is operating  
and screen data can be written. (The NT31/NT31C can be returned to RUN  
mode after the screen data is written.)  
The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a  
fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for  
maintenance.  
For more details on the memory link online transfer function, refer to information  
on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C  
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Operating  
Section 1-6  
1-6 Before Operating  
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT31/NT31C.  
Host  
Support Tool  
NT31/NT31C  
Set the host settings.  
Install the Support  
Tool at the computer.  
Install the PT in the  
operation panel.  
For the host link, refer to  
pages 54 and 101, and  
the manuals for the host  
link unit and peripheral  
tools.  
(refer to the manual for  
the Support Tool)  
(page 32)  
Connect the power supply.  
(page 33)  
For the NT link (1:1), refer  
to pages 67 and 111.  
*1  
Install the system program.  
(refer to page 151 and the  
Support Tool manual)  
For the NT link (1:N), re-  
fer to pages 72 and 113.  
For the high-speed NT  
link (1:N), refer to pages  
75 and 115.  
Create the screens.  
Make the settings in the  
system installer mode.  
*2  
(Refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C  
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual  
and the Support Tool Operation Manual.)  
(page 151)  
For the Memory link, refer  
to pages 72 and 116  
(page 155)  
Transmit the screen data.  
Set the memory switches.  
(page 157)  
Connect to the host.  
Connect to the  
NT31/NT31C.  
When RS-232C used at the PT: refer to section 4  
When RS-422A/485 used at the PT: refer to section 5  
Confirm the settings and  
check communication.  
Create the host program.  
Start operation.  
*1: System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for example  
when changing the system program, or to recover the original status of the  
installed program. This operation is not normally necessary. When using other PC  
models (sequencers), however, it is necessary to install specific system programs.  
*2: Display of the system menu, and all change operations, can be inhibited. This  
enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and  
settings.  
Reference: S For the system program, use the NT31/NT31C system program supplied as  
an accessory with the NT-series Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).  
S For the Support Tool, use NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1).  
Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software.  
Device or Software  
Manual Title  
Manual  
Number  
NT31/NT31C,  
Reference Manual  
V064-E1-1  
NT631/NT631C  
System Installer  
Support Tool  
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual  
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual  
V061-E1-j  
V061-E1-j  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Operating  
Section 1-6  
Device or Software  
Manual Title  
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual  
Manual  
Number  
PC  
W262-E1-j  
W317-E1-j  
W352-E1-j  
W356-E1-j  
W130-E1-j  
W217-E1-j  
W236-E1-j  
W235-E1-j  
W302-E1-j  
W303-E1-j  
W322-E1-j  
W140-E1-j  
W228-E1-j  
W363-E1-j  
W202-E1-j  
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual  
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual  
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual  
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (programming)  
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (programming)  
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide  
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (programming)  
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE (-Z) Installation Guide  
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual  
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Programming Manual  
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual (programming)  
SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual  
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual  
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Dia-  
grams  
CS1-series CS1G/H-CPU jj-E Programmable Controllers Operation  
W339-E1-j  
Manual  
CS1-series Serial Communication Boards/Units Operation Manual  
W336-E1-j  
SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365-E1-j  
CompoBus Master Control SRM1 Operation Manual  
Unit  
W318-E1-j  
Programming Devices  
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PCs  
W248-E1-j  
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PCs  
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide  
W249-E1-j  
W332-E1-j  
W333-E1-j  
CX-Programmer User Manual  
-
Host Link Unit/  
Serial Communications  
Board  
SYSMAC C-series Host Link Unit Operation Manual  
SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series Host Link Operation Manual  
W143-E1-j  
W205-E1-j  
SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HW-COM06-EV1 W304-E1-j  
Serial Communications Board Operation Manual  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 2  
Preparing for Connection  
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts of PTs, as the  
required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.  
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
26  
29  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Method for Connection to the Host  
Section 2-1  
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host  
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the  
NT31/NT31C, and the relationship between the connection method and the  
communication method.  
NT31/NT31C Communication Ports and Communication Methods  
The NT31/NT31C has two communication ports. Their uses are indicated in the  
table below.  
Communication  
Usable Communication Methods  
Communication Type  
Port  
Host link  
NT link (1:1)  
NT link (1:N)  
*
Serial port A  
RS-232C  
Memory link  
(Support Tool connection)  
(bar code reader input function)  
Host link  
NT link (1:1)  
NT link (1:N)  
Memory link  
RS-232C  
RS-422A/485  
(select between RS-232C  
and RS-422A/485)  
Serial port B  
*
* There are two NT Link (1:N) communications rates: standard and high-speed.  
Communication Methods That Can Be Used with the Host  
The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be  
connected to the NT31/NT31C.  
RS-232C  
RS-422A  
RS-485  
The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the  
host unit. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the  
RS-232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
Converting the Communication Type with an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor  
Unit  
The following communication type conversions are possible by using an  
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E, made by OMRON).  
RS-232C RS-422A  
RS-232C RS-485  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Method for Connection to the Host  
Section 2-1  
Combinations of Communication Method and Connection Method  
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication  
method used and the communication type for communication between the  
NT31/NT31C and the host are indicated in the table below.  
Usable Communication  
Method  
Communica-  
tion Type at  
PT  
Communica-  
tion Type at  
Host  
Usable Connection Method  
Details  
NT  
NT  
Link  
Host  
link  
Memory  
link  
Link  
(1:1) (1:N)  
Direct 1:1 connection  
PT  
Host  
Host  
RS-232C  
RS-232C  
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
79  
RS-232C (max. 15 m)  
1:1 connection via a convertor unit  
PT  
Convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
88  
RS-232C  
(max. 2 m)  
RS-422A  
(max. 500 m)  
1:N connection via a convertor unit  
PT  
RS-232C  
Host  
Convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
RS-422A  
RS-232C  
 
f
 
 
f
 
f
f
f
 
f
 
92  
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)  
RS-422A  
Direct 1:1 connection  
PT  
Host  
117  
122  
RS-422A (max. 500 m)  
1:N connection  
PT  
Host  
RS-422A  
RS-422A (total length 500 m)  
f: Connection possible  : Connection not possible  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Method for Connection to the Host  
Section 2-1  
Usable Communication  
Method  
Communica-  
tion Type at  
PT  
Communica-  
tion Type at  
Host  
Usable Connection Method  
Details  
NT  
Link  
NT  
Link  
Host  
link  
Memory  
link  
(1:1) (1:N)  
1:1 connection via a convertor unit  
PT  
Convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
Host  
 
 
f
 
88  
RS-485  
(max. 500 m)  
RS-232C  
(max. 2 m)  
1:N connection via a convertor unit  
RS-232C  
PT  
Host  
Convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
 
 
 
 
 
 
f
f
f
 
 
 
92  
RS-485  
RS232C  
(total length 500 m)  
(max. 2 m)  
RS-485  
Direct 1:1 connection  
PT  
Host  
121  
125  
RS-485 (max. 500 m)  
1:N connection  
PT  
Host  
RS-485  
RS-485 (total length 500 m)  
f: Connection possible  : Connection not possible  
The RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at  
pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector  
at the host.  
+5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT31/NT31C. When connecting an  
NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required for the NT-  
AL001.  
The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the  
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply  
from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is OFF).  
NT link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the  
NT31/NT31C side for communication with the host, but in this case one NT-  
AL001 unit is required for each NT31/NT31C. In this case, it is convenient to  
use serial port A of the NT31/NT31C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions of Parts  
Section 2-2  
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts  
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the  
NT31/NT31C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware set-  
tings is also described.  
Front View  
POWER LED  
Lit in green when the power is supplied.  
POWER  
RUN  
RUN LED  
Display  
The NT31 has a monochrome LCD  
screen with a backlight, and the NT31C  
has an STN color LCD screen with a  
backlight.  
The whole area of the screen is a touch  
panel which works as an input device.  
Lit in green while the unit  
is in the RUN mode.  
Lit in orange or red when  
the battery is low (orange  
in the RUN mode, red in  
other modes).  
Reference: The NT31/NT31C comes in two body colors.  
NT31  
NT31C  
Body Color  
Beige  
NT31-ST121-EV2  
NT31-ST121B-EV2  
NT31C-ST141-EV2  
NT31C-ST141B-EV2  
Black  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions of Parts  
Section 2-2  
Rear View  
Battery cover  
The battery is secured underneath this cover.  
Reset switch (inside the cover)  
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT31/NT31C.  
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory  
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.  
Expansion interface connector  
(under the label)  
When using an expansion  
interface unit such as a memory  
unit, peel off the label and  
connect it here.  
GR terminal  
Grounding terminal to prevent  
malfunction due to noise.  
24V  
DC  
PRINTER  
PORT  
B
PORT  
A
Power input terminals  
Connect the power to the  
NT31/NT31C at these  
terminals.  
Warning label  
Backlight unit (inside the cover)  
Open the cover to reveal the backlight.  
The backlight is off while the cover is  
removed. Tighten the cover screw  
securely.  
Serial port A connector  
Connect the cable for connection to the  
host or Support Tool here. A bar code  
reader can also be connected here. This is  
a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.  
Serial port B connector  
Connect the cable for connection to the host here. Depending on the  
setting made at the NT31/NT31C system menu, either RS-232C or  
RS-422A/485 may be used. This is a 25-pin connector.  
It is not possible to use RS-232C and RS-422A/485 at the same time.  
Printer connector  
Connect the printer cable here. Output  
conforms to Centronics specifications.  
Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 3  
Hardware Settings and Connections  
This section describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.  
For details on connecting to the host, refer Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to  
the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
3-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
32  
32  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
36  
37  
37  
37  
38  
39  
40  
40  
47  
48  
48  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Section 3-1  
Note On unpacking the NT31/NT31C and peripheral devices, check their external ap-  
pearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no ab-  
normal noise on shaking the unit lightly.  
3-1 Installation  
Install the NT31/NT31C in the operation panel and connect the power to the  
NT31/NT31C as described below.  
3-1-1 Installation Environment  
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.  
Note 1. Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions.  
Severe temperature variations  
Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications  
High humidity, condensation  
Splashing chemical agents  
Severe oil splashing  
Corrosive or flammable gases  
Strong vibrations or shocks  
Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)  
Strong ultra-violet irradiation  
2. Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location  
subject to any of the following conditions.  
Static electricity, or noise from other equipment  
Strong electromagnetic fields  
Nearby power cables  
Potential exposure to radioactivity  
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel  
The NT31/NT31C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel.  
Use the panel fittings and tool (Philips screwdriver) included in the product pack-  
age and follow the procedure below.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the  
NT31/NT31C from the front side of the panel.  
131 + 0.5 mm  
0
mm  
+ 0.5 mm  
184  
0
mm  
2. Attach the panel fittings at the four positions at top and bottom and two posi-  
tions at right and left, shown below, from the rear of the NT31/NT31C.  
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw  
with the Philips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.  
24V  
DC  
PRINTER  
PORT  
B
PORT  
A
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Section 3-1  
Note 1. During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the  
unit.  
2. The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings  
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 Nm in order to ensure  
water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT31/NT31C may be warped if  
the tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not be soiled or  
warped, and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure  
and strong.  
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection  
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.  
Note 1. Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may  
stop. Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.  
2. Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.  
3. Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.  
4. Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.  
5. Do not perform a dielectric strength test.  
6. If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply  
with reinforced insulation (compliance with EC directives is planned for June  
1998).  
24 VDC  
Breaker  
24 VDC  
power supply  
Power Supply  
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.  
Item  
Value  
Power supply  
24 VDC  
Allowable power supply voltage fluctuation range 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC  
(24 VDC –15%, +10%)  
Power supply voltage capacity  
15 W or more  
Parts Used for Connection  
2
Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm or  
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.  
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 Nm.  
Fork type  
Round type  
7 mm or less  
7 mm or less  
Recommended Terminals  
Maker  
Type  
Type  
Applicable Wire  
(fork type) (round type) (stranded wire)  
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG  
Fuji Terminal  
2-YS3A  
2-YAS3.5  
2Y-3.5  
2-3.5  
2
2.0 to 2.63 mm  
V2-S3.5  
2-3.5  
Nichifu Terminal  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Section 3-1  
3-1-4 Grounding  
The NT31/NT31C has a functional ground terminal ( ).  
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. In cases where the distance between the NT31/NT31C is small and it is as-  
sumed that there is no potential difference between grounds, ground as  
shown in Fig. (a) below.  
2. In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the  
NT31/NT31C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. (b). If there is some dis-  
tance between the NT31/NT31C and host and grounding at a single point is  
difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of the  
NT31/NT31C.  
3. If the NT31/NT31C is installed in the same panel as equipment that gener-  
ates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional ground  
terminal ( ) of the NT31/NT31C.  
NT31/  
NT31C  
NT31/  
NT31C  
Host  
Host  
Grounding at  
a single point  
Fig. (b)  
Ground to  
100 max.  
Fig. (a)  
Note Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Support Tool  
Section 3-2  
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool  
In order to install the system program in the NT31/NT31C, or to transmit screen  
data created with the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, the NT31/NT31C must  
be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.  
The NT31/NT31C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at se-  
rial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with the  
host can be maintained as it is while the NT31/NT31C is connected to the  
RS-232C cable from a personal computer.  
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so that  
the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.  
PRINTER  
PORT  
B
PORT  
A
Serial port A  
(RS-232C, 9-pin)  
Communication Conditions  
The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer  
and Support Tool are started.  
Recommended Connector Cable  
Use the cable indicated below.  
CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON  
(D-SUB 9-pin, male D-SUB 25-pin, male)  
XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON  
(D-SUB 25-pin, female half pitch 14-pin, male)  
XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON  
(D-SUB 9-pin, male D-SUB 9-pin, female)  
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix F Making the Cable  
for Connecting a PC (page 269).  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting a Printer  
Section 3-3  
3-3 Connecting a Printer  
Connecting a printer to the NT31/NT31C enables printing of hard copies of the  
currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system menu op-  
erations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.  
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected  
to the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to the pages cited.  
Hard copies of the screen (Refer to information on printing data and checking  
the printer status in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Termi-  
nal Reference Manual.)  
Screen display history record data (page 198)  
Alarm history record data (page 200)  
3-3-1 Connection Method  
Connect the printer to the NT31/NT31C with a Centronics cable, as shown be-  
low. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.  
Reference: If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer  
is on, the NT31/NT31C may malfunction. Always turn off the power to the printer  
before connecting or disconnecting the cable.  
24V  
DCPRINTER  
PORT  
B
PORT  
A
Recommended Connector Cable  
The following connection cables are recommended.  
NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON  
Recommended Printers  
When using a printer, use one that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using  
the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol) or complies with one of the follow-  
ing EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24-J82  
(monochrome).  
When using a monochrome printer with an NT31C, set Tone printing with the  
NT31C memory switches (page 174).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting a Bar Code Reader  
Section 3-4  
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader  
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT31/NT31C enables bar code data to read  
as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character string  
memory tables.  
In order to use a bar code reader, the Comm. A Method memory switch must be  
set to Bar-Code Reader.  
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader,  
refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the NT31/NT31C/  
NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.  
Note Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to  
the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.  
3-4-1 Connection Method  
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT31/NT31C, as shown in the  
figure below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Bar code reader  
PRINTER  
PORT  
B
PORT  
A
Serial port A  
9-pin connector  
(RS-232C, 9-pin)  
Connector cable  
Bar code reader cable  
Bar code reader must match the communication setting (3-4-2 Setting a Bar  
Code Reader, page 37) and data format (3-4-3 Data Format, page 38) in order to  
connect to the NT31/NT31C. Please confirm the specification of the bar code  
reader before using.  
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Making the Cable  
for Connection to a Bar Code Reader (page 271).  
Reference: The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it cannot  
be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that when a bar  
code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.  
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader  
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communication conditions and other  
settings for it by selection from the system menu.  
Settings at the  
NT31/NT31C  
At the NT31/NT31C, set the communication conditions for communication with  
the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from the options  
indicated in the table below.  
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to  
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 188).  
Item  
Possible Settings  
7 or 8 bits  
Default Setting  
Data bits  
7 bits  
2 bits  
Even  
Stop bit(s)  
Parity  
1 or 2 bits  
None, odd, even  
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps  
Input Method Manual, Auto  
9600 bps  
Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting a Bar Code Reader  
Section 3-4  
Settings at the Bar Code  
Reader  
Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure  
that the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match the  
communication settings made at the NT31/NT31C. For details on the setting  
method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.  
Item  
Communications speed  
Possible Settings  
4800, 9600, 19200 bps  
EVEN, ODD, NONE  
1 or 2 bits  
Parity  
Stop bits  
Data bits  
7 or 8 bits  
Preamble  
STX  
Postamble  
ETX  
RS/CS control  
Communication protocol  
Available  
No-protocol mode  
Transmission of number of bar code label digits Transmission prohibited  
Transmission of ID characters  
Bar code types  
Transmission prohibited  
Multi-reading (all types can be  
read)  
Trigger switch setting  
Automatic reading mode  
About RS/CS Control  
During bar code reading, the NT31/NT31C performs RS/CS control. When the  
Input Method setting of the NT31/NT31C is set to Auto, the RS signal is turned  
OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been notified to the host.  
Because of this, when the Auto setting is made, the next input is not possible  
until the data has been notified to the host.  
However, when the setting is Auto and the RS/CS signals of the cable are  
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar  
code reader to the NT31/NT31C is updated regardless of whether or not the data  
is notified to the host.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.  
3-4-3 Data Format  
The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the  
NT31/NT31C is shown below.  
STX  
Data  
Data  
Data  
ETX  
(02H)  
(03H)  
The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to  
7FH, and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.  
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and  
discarded.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with a V1 or V2 version of an  
NT31/NT31C PT (NT31-ST121j-EVj or NT31C-ST141j-EVj).  
Reference: Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed, the func-  
tion and using method of memory unit varies as follows.  
PT Model  
System Program  
Function of Memory Unit  
Conventional memory unit function. (Refer to  
56.)  
(System programs can not be transmitted us-  
ing memory unit.)  
Earlier than Ver. 2  
Without Vj  
suffix  
Ver. 2 or later  
New memory unit function.  
(System programs can be transmitted using  
memory unit.)  
Earlier than Ver. 2  
Ver. 2 or later  
With Vj suf-  
fix  
The memory unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used, re-  
gardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT.  
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in  
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.  
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the  
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that system program and screen  
data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Sup-  
port Tool.  
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other  
means.  
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of  
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with  
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be  
changed simply by installing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support  
Tool.  
In addition, even if NT31/NT31C is replaced, the previous status can be main-  
tained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and  
screen data of the previous NT31/NT31C.  
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a  
memory unit.  
Screen data for two PTs.  
System program for two PTs.  
System program and screen data for one PT.  
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.  
Note 1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis-  
connecting a memory unit.  
After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.  
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the  
NT31/NT31C or reset it.  
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
Reference: S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the oper-  
ating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always  
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting  
NT31/NT31C operation.  
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT mod-  
els: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (with or without the Vj suffix). One  
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. How-  
ever, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and  
NT631/NT631C, an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data  
with an NT31C. (The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)  
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and  
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be cor-  
rect since these models have different numbers of colors.  
S One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different  
models. In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the  
NT31/NT31C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT model.  
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded  
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is  
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to  
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.  
3-5-1 Installation Method  
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the  
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below (the expansion interface  
connector is located underneath the note label.).  
Mounting screws  
3-5-2 Method of Use  
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,  
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.  
OFF  
OFF  
SW1  
SW2  
Note 1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the  
DIP switches.  
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
DIP Switch Functions  
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table  
below.  
SW1  
Switch  
Function  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory  
unit to the PT)  
SW1-1  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to  
the memory unit)  
SW1-2  
SW1-3  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission  
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)  
OFF: Screen data  
SW1-4 Data type to transfer  
ON : System  
program  
SW2  
Switch  
Function  
OFF: Disable  
ON : Enable  
OFF: Disable  
ON : Enable  
OFF: Bank 0  
ON : Bank 1  
OFF: Disable  
ON : Enable  
SW2-1 Disable/enable writing to PT  
SW2-2 Disable/enable writing to the memory unit  
SW2-3 Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission. *  
SW2-4 System/Screen simultaneous transmission  
* The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of  
areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which  
of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.  
Reference: S The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to NT31/NT31C  
with the Vj suffix.  
S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.  
More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.  
None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.  
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.  
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for  
SW2-1 or SW2-2.  
S In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.  
An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT  
system program area.  
An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data  
area.  
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors  
When Using a Memory Unit (page 45).  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
Writing Screen Data to a  
Memory Unit Using  
Automatic Transmission  
(PT to Memory Unit)  
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly  
written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.  
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation  
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera-  
tion site is using the system.  
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in  
the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into only one  
Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the  
memory unit by automatic transmission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP  
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to  
NT31/NT31C.  
SW2  
SW1  
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously  
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously  
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1  
OFF: Bank 0  
SW1-4 ON: System program  
OFF: Screen data  
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the PT),  
but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating  
errors.  
Reference: S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables  
the setting of SW1-4.  
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables  
the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and the screen  
data into bank 1 at all times.  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen  
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-  
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.  
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the  
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).  
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.  
Preparing  
Transmitting  
Verifying  
: flashes at intervals of 1 second  
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second  
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second  
: lights up  
Finished  
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.  
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back  
ON.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
Writing Screen Data to  
the PT Using Automatic  
Transmission (Memory  
Unit to PT)  
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly  
written to NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.  
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or  
system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same  
system program or screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes  
convenient.  
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until  
that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of  
NT31/NT31C also changes.  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the  
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the  
memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT31/NT31C.  
SW1  
SW2  
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously  
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously  
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1  
OFF: Bank 0  
SW1-4 ON: System program  
OFF: Screen data  
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the  
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the  
event of operating errors.  
Reference: S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables  
the setting of SW1-4.  
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables  
the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes possible  
only if the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations.  
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program  
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program  
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.  
S When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system  
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are dis-  
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.  
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the  
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).  
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.  
Preparing  
Transmitting  
Verifying  
: flashes at intervals of 1 second  
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second  
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second  
: lights up  
Finished  
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.  
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back  
ON.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
Reading and Writing Data  
by Manual Transmission  
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used  
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be  
executed while checking the settings.  
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been  
stored up until that point is lost.  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the  
memory unit as follows.  
SW2  
SW1  
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant  
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant  
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant  
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to  
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data  
is to be read.  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
Display language select screen appears.  
3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display lan-  
guage.  
The following descriptions are for when English is selected.  
The screen shown below is displayed.  
Current PT Screen Data, System  
The first line:  
Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT.  
The second line: System program name and Version for the system pro-  
gram inside PT.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)  
Current PT Screen Data, Screen  
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.  
Current Memory Unit Screen Data  
In the case of system program:  
The first line:  
Compatible PT type for the system program inside the  
memory unit.  
The second line: System program name and Version for the system pro-  
gram inside the memory unit.  
(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some  
models.)  
In the case of screen data:  
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.  
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of  
the origin of transmitting as described in the table below.  
Source  
[PT]screen  
Destination  
[Memory unit] Bank 1  
[Memory unit] Bank 0  
[PT]system  
[PT]system/screen  
[Memory unit] Bank 0  
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 (fixed)  
S If system program is selected  
[PT]system (fixed)  
S If screen data is selected  
[PT]screen (fixed)  
[Memory unit] Bank 1  
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 [PT]system/screen (fixed)  
Reference: S When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from  
the PT to the memory unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system program,  
Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the  
PT, either of the following combinations must be used.  
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program  
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program  
S When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system  
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.  
4. Press Execute.  
The data is transmitted.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-  
played in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the same  
time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of  
the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).  
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN LED remains OFF.  
5. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch  
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Errors When Using a  
Memory Unit  
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as  
follows.  
The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.  
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to  
the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content of  
error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the au-  
tomatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)  
Section 3-5  
The continuous buzzer sounds.  
The RUN LED flashes.  
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is pos-  
sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the  
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above re-  
mains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.  
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.  
Error  
Probable Cause  
Remedial Action  
Mode setting error  
DIP switches SW1-1 to  
SW1-3 are all OFF, or  
more than one is ON.  
Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, set the memory unit DIP  
switches correctly, then turn the  
NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Protect setting error Writing to the data write  
Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, set the memory unit DIP  
(automatic  
destination has been  
transmission)  
prohibited by the setting switches correctly, then turn the  
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.  
NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Protect setting error Writing to the data write  
Perform either of the following  
procedures.  
(manual  
destination has been  
transmission)  
prohibited by the setting S Press the OK touch switch to re-  
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.  
turn to the memory unit manual  
transmission screen, make the  
correct settings, then try again.  
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, correct the DIP switches  
settings of the memory unit, then  
turn the power back ON.  
Flash memory error An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
initialization of the OFF, then back ON. If the error  
NT31/NT31C or memory recurs, the flash memory at the  
unit flash memory, or write destination may be faulty. In  
during write processing. this case, replace the unit.  
Verify error  
An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
verification processing at OFF, then back ON. If the error  
the flash memory of the  
NT31/NT31C or the  
memory unit.  
recurs, the flash memory at the  
write destination may be faulty. In  
this case, replace the unit.  
Transmitting data  
error  
(The automatic  
transmission only)  
An attempt is made to  
transmit data other than procedures.  
a system program or the S Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
Perform either of the following  
system program of a  
different PC model into  
the NT31/NT31C as the  
system program.  
An attempt is made to  
write a system program  
into the NT31/NT31C as  
screen data.  
OFF, correct the DIP switch set-  
tings of the memory unit, and  
then turn the power back ON.  
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, set the DIP switch settings  
to the manual transmission, and  
then check the data inside the  
memory unit.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with the basic versions of the  
NT31/NT31C PTs (NT31-ST121j-E or NT31C-ST141j-E).  
Reference: In this case, the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the  
NT31/NT31C without the Vj suffix. (The system program transmission by using  
a memory unit cannot be processed.)  
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in  
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.  
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the  
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that screen data can be changed  
easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.  
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other  
means.  
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of  
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with  
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be  
changed simply by changing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support  
Tool.  
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.  
Note 1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis-  
connecting a memory unit. After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten  
its two screws.  
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the  
NT31/NT31C or reset it.  
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.  
Reference: S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the oper-  
ating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always  
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting  
NT31/NT31C operation.  
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT mod-  
els: NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C (with or without the Vj suffix). One  
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. How-  
ever, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and  
NT631/NT631C, the data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it  
through a conversion (the data must be converted using the Support Tool).  
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and  
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be cor-  
rect since these models have different numbers of colors.  
The screen data for NT31/NT31C PTs with system program Ver. 2 or later  
cannot be used with PTs with system program earlier than Ver. 2.  
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded  
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is  
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to  
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
3-6-1 Installation Method  
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the  
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below. (The expansion interface  
connector is located underneath the note label.)  
Mounting screws  
3-6-2 Method of Use  
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,  
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.  
OFF  
OFF  
SW1  
SW2  
Note 1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the  
DIP switches.  
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.  
DIP Switch Functions  
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table  
below.  
SW1  
Switch  
Function  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory  
unit to the PT)  
SW1-1  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to  
the memory unit)  
SW1-2  
SW1-3  
OFF: Not executed  
ON : Executed  
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission  
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)  
SW1-4 Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)  
SW2  
Switch  
SW2-1 Disable/enable writing to PT  
Function  
OFF: Disable  
ON : Enable  
OFF: Disable  
ON : Enable  
OFF: Bank 0  
ON : Bank 1  
SW2-2 Disable/enable writing to the memory unit  
SW2-3 Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission.  
SW2-4 Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
* The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area (bank 0,  
bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of  
these two banks is used for automatic transmission.  
Reference: S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.  
More than one of the SW1 switches are set to ON.  
None of the SW1 switches are set to ON.  
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.  
Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2-1  
or SW2-2.  
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors  
When Using a Memory Unit (page 3 to 25).  
Writing Screen Data to a  
Memory Unit Using  
Automatic Transmission  
(PT to Memory Unit)  
In this mode, the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly written to the  
memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.  
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation  
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera-  
tion site is using the system.  
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in  
the specified area up until that point is lost (there is no effect on the other area).  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the  
memory unit by automatic transmission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP  
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in  
NT31/NT31C.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
SW1  
SW2  
SW2-3  
ON: Bank 1  
OFF: Bank 0  
It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the  
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the  
event of operating errors.  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen  
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-  
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.  
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the  
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN  
LED lights.  
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit. To operate  
NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Writing Screen Data to  
In this mode, screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the  
NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.  
the PT Using Automatic  
Transmission (Memory  
Unit to PT)  
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is  
used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or  
screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes convenient.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until  
that point is lost.  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the  
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the  
memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in NT31/NT31C.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
SW1  
SW2  
SW2-3  
ON: Bank 1  
OFF: Bank 0  
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the  
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the  
event of operating errors.  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are dis-  
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.  
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the  
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN  
LED lights.  
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, and remove the memory unit.  
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back  
ON.  
Reading and Writing Data  
by Manual Transmission  
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used  
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be  
executed while checking the settings.  
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been  
stored up until that point is lost.  
Method of Execution  
Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual trans-  
mission.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the  
memory unit as follows.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
SW1  
SW2  
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant  
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to  
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data  
is to be read.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.  
The screen shown below is displayed.  
(Example)  
Current PT Screen Data  
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.  
Current Memory Unit Screen Data  
The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here.  
Pressing the Trans. Direction Change and Bank Change touch switches chan-  
ges the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the memory  
unit used.  
3. Press Execute.  
The data is transmitted.  
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-  
played in accordance with the progress of data transmission.  
4. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch  
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Errors When Using a  
Memory Unit  
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as  
follows.  
The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.  
The continuous buzzer sounds.  
The RUN LED flashes.  
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is pos-  
sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the  
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above re-  
mains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.  
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.  
Error  
Probable Cause  
Remedial Action  
Mode setting error  
DIP switches SW1-1 to  
SW1-3 are all OFF, or  
more than one is ON.  
Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, set the memory unit DIP  
switches correctly, then turn the  
NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Protect setting error Writing to the data write  
Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, set the memory unit DIP  
(automatic  
destination has been  
transmission)  
prohibited by the setting switches correctly, then turn the  
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.  
NT31/NT31C power back ON.  
Protect setting error Writing to the data write  
Perform either of the following  
procedures.  
(manual  
destination has been  
transmission)  
prohibited by the setting S Press the OK touch switch to re-  
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.  
turn to the memory unit manual  
transmission screen, make the  
correct settings, then try again.  
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
OFF, correct the DIP switches  
settings of the memory unit, then  
turn the power back ON.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)  
Section 3-6  
Error  
Flash memory error An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
initialization of the OFF, then back ON. If the error  
NT31/NT31C or memory recurs, the flash memory at the  
unit flash memory, or write destination may be faulty. In  
Probable Cause  
Remedial Action  
during write processing. this case, replace the unit.  
Verify error  
An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power  
verification processing at OFF, then back ON. If the error  
the flash memory of the  
NT31/NT31C or the  
memory unit.  
recurs, the flash memory at the  
write destination may be faulty. In  
this case, replace the unit.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 4  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port  
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.  
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
54  
54  
79  
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the  
RS-232C port of the host is as follows.  
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs  
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary  
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-  
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Con-  
nection Manual (V060-E1-j).  
Direct Connection Between The RS-232C Ports Using an RS-232C Cable  
(Page 111)  
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the con-  
nection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)  
Reference: The CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link meth-  
od. Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection.  
For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 72) or Using the High-  
speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75).  
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings  
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports of  
both units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.  
When Using the Host Link Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in.  
In the CS1-series or CQM1H PCs, the host link method can be used by installing  
a Serial Communication Board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have  
an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a  
Communication Board.  
Check the model and series of the PC, the type of installed Serial Communica-  
tion Board, Serial Communication Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a con-  
nection.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the host link method  
using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.  
CPUs Connectable with Host Link  
Units or Expansion Communication  
Board  
PC Se-  
ries  
Units with Built-in Host Link  
Function  
Host Link Unit/  
Communication Board  
Connectable  
to  
CS1W-SCU21  
CS1W-SCB21  
CS1W-SCB41  
CS1 Se-  
ries  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1  
CS1G  
CS1H  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000H  
C2000H  
---  
C120-LK201-EV1  
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E  
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E  
C200HS  
C200HE  
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE  
C200HE-Z  
C200HG  
C200HG-Z  
C200HX  
---  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE  
C200H-LK201-EV1  
C200HX-Z  
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E  
---  
---  
C200HS  
C200HE-CPU42-E  
C20HE-CPU42-ZE  
C200HE-CPU32/42-E  
C200HE  
C200HE-Z  
C200HG  
C200HG-Z  
C200HX  
C200HX-Z  
C1000H  
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C200HG-CPU43/63-E  
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE  
C200HX-CPU44/64-E  
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE  
C200HW-COM02/04/  
05/06-EV1  
C Series  
---  
---  
C500-LK201-EV1  
C500-LK203  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000HF-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000H (F)  
C2000H  
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-j  
+CPM1-CIF01  
---  
---  
---  
---  
CPM1  
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-j  
+CPM1-CIF01  
CPM2A-30/40/60CDjj-j  
+CPM1-CIF01  
(Peripheral port connection)  
---  
---  
---  
CPM2A  
CPM2C-10/20jjjjjj-j  
(*1)  
---  
---  
CPM2C  
CQM1  
CQM1-CPU21-E  
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61 (*2)  
---  
CQM1H-CPU51/61  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CQM1H-SCB41  
CQM1H  
CV500  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CV Se-  
ries (*3)  
CV1000  
CV2000  
CV500-LK201  
CV500-LK201  
CVM1  
Series  
(*3)  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1  
Compo-  
Bus/S  
master  
control  
unit  
SRM1-C02-V1  
---  
---  
SRM1  
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11  
RS-422A Adapter to connect.  
*2: The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a  
CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.  
*3: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Settings at the Host  
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at the  
host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or  
settings not shown here may be necessary).  
Item  
Switch Setting  
I/O port  
RS-232C  
(*1)  
Communications speed  
Transfer code  
Parity  
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.  
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits  
Even  
(*2)  
1-to-1/1-to-N  
Instruction level  
Unit #  
1-to-N  
Level 1, 2, 3  
00  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link  
Method (page 160).  
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually  
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.  
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.  
Connecting to a C-series Host Link Unit  
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Backplane mounted type:  
C200H-LK201-V1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the  
setting value window agree with the following.  
LK201  
XMT  
RUN  
RCV  
ERROR  
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)  
Set these switches to 0.  
SW1  
SW3  
SW2  
0
0
5
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)  
SW4  
Set this switch to 2.  
2
@ Communications speed (SW3)  
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.  
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.  
Setting the Rear Switches  
ON  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)  
1
2
3
Set #3 to ON.  
4
CTS selector switch  
External  
@ CTS selection (selector switch)  
0V (ON)  
Set this always to 0V (ON).  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
C1000H(F)/C2000H Backplane mounted type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Local  
Host  
Mode control (key switch)  
Set this to host link.  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-232C.  
I/O port  
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)  
8
7
6
5
RS-422A  
RS-232C  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).  
4
3
2
1
SW1  
Synchronization  
Internal  
External  
ON  
@ Synchronization (selector switch)  
Set this to Internal.  
8
Terminator  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF  
ON  
SW2  
CTS  
@ Communications speed  
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
0V  
External  
ON  
Set these switches to 0010 to select  
19,200 bps.  
Set these switches to 1010 to select  
9,600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
@ CTS selection (selector switch)  
Set this always to 0V (ON).  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
C1000H/C2000H Backplane mounted type: C500-LK203  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-232C.  
5V supply  
ON  
OFF  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code  
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)  
I/O port  
RS-422A  
RS-232C  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).  
SW1  
Synchronization  
Internal  
ON  
External  
@ Synchronization (selector switch)  
Set this to Internal.  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminator  
OFF  
ON  
SW2  
CTS  
@ Communications speed  
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
0V  
External  
ON  
Set these switches to 0010 to select  
19,200 bps.  
Set these switches to 1010 to select  
9,600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
@ CTS selection (selector switch)  
Set this always to 0V (ON).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code  
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).  
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is  
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.  
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.  
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
SW1  
SW2  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
SW3  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
@ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)  
Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0).  
(Set this always to 0V.)  
@ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)  
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to ON (1), and  
SW3-4 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.)  
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit  
CVM1/CV series backplane mounted type: CV500-LK201  
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (commu-  
nication ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an  
NT31/NT31C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at these  
ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be pre-  
pared.  
Communication port 1  
Communication port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.  
Communication port 2  
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the  
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C meth-  
od, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-232C  
(the upper position).  
CPU Bus Unit Settings  
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following commu-  
nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.  
Item  
Communications speed  
Transfer code  
Parity  
Setting at Host  
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C  
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits  
Even  
(*1)  
(*2)  
1-to-1, 1-to-N  
Instruction level  
1-to-N  
Level 1, 2, 3  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link  
Method (page160).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually  
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.  
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYS-  
MAC support software).  
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series  
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).  
Setting the Front Switches  
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)  
When using communication port 2, set these  
switches to 0.  
Communications port 1  
(RS-232C)  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-232C.  
Communications port 2  
(RS-232C/RS-422A)  
@ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)  
Set SW2 or SW3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.)  
I/O port selector switch  
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use  
communication port 2, set SW3.  
RS-232C  
RS-422A  
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)  
Set this switch to OFF.  
Communication is executed in accordance with the  
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The  
initial values for the system settings are as follows.  
- Communications speed: 9600 bps  
- Parity: Even  
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed  
- Communication method: Full duplex  
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits  
- Data length: 7 bits  
Connecting to a CS1-series Serial Communication Unit  
CS1 series Backplane mounted type: CS1W-SCU21  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch  
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that  
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.  
SCU21  
RDY  
ERH  
SD2  
RD2  
RUN  
ERC  
SD1  
RD1  
UNIT  
Set the unit number to 0 through F so  
that it will not overlap with the numbers  
used in other units.  
No.  
C
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU  
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or  
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of  
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the  
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of  
the STUP command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings  
are shown.  
m=DM30000+100×unit # (CH)  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Port 1  
Port 2  
host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data  
length 7 bits  
m
m+10  
8000  
0000  
0007  
0000  
0000  
Communication speed 9600 bps.  
Communication speed 19200 bps.  
Transmit delay time 0 ms.  
m+1  
m+11  
m+2  
m+6  
m+12  
m+16  
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link  
Connecting to a CPU Unit  
CV-series and CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPU Units  
CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
PC Setup  
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication  
conditions for the PC Setup.  
Item  
Communications speed  
Stop bit  
Setting at Host  
(*1)  
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C  
2 stop bits  
Even  
Parity  
Data length  
Unit #  
ASCII 7 bits  
00  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link  
Method (page 160).  
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support  
software), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.  
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000 Op-  
eration Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Setting the Front Switches  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-232C.  
@ System setting (DIP SW4)  
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,  
set SW4 to ON.  
To effect the existing PC Setup, set SW4  
to OFF.  
I/O port selector switch  
RS-232C  
Note  
RS-422A  
For CPUs manufactured before or during  
June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the existing  
DIP switch settings differ from the  
existing PC Setup as follows.  
- DIP switch settings:  
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit  
data length  
- PC Setup:  
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit  
data length  
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995  
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated  
values in the DIP switch settings also are  
9,600 bps and 2 stop bits.  
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,  
CQM1H CPUs, SRM1  
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in  
the following table.  
PC model  
Connection method  
C200HS, CQM1  
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.  
Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a  
Serial Communications Board.  
CQM1H  
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.  
Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118  
Connecting Cable.  
Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Commu-  
nications Board.  
CPM1  
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01  
RS-232C Adapter.  
CPM2A, SRM1  
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.  
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01  
RS-232C Adapter.  
CPM2C  
Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral  
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111,  
CS1W-CN118, or CS1W-CN114).  
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port  
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01  
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this  
peripheral port.)  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
PC Setup Area Settings  
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,  
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU, or SRM1, set the following communication  
conditions for the PC Setup area.  
Item  
Communication mode  
Communications speed  
Stop bit  
Setting at Host  
Host link mode  
(*1)  
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C  
2 stop bits  
Even  
Parity  
Data length  
ASCII 7 bits  
00  
Unit #  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link  
Method (page160).  
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. the  
CX-Programmer support software).  
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for  
the PC which is used.  
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the  
unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.  
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral port connection  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6650 0001  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6651 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6653 0000  
Unit # 00  
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other than  
the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C port connection  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6645 0001  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6646 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6648 0000  
Unit # 00  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port A  
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board port 1  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6555 0001  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6556 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6558 0000  
Unit # 00  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port B  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6550 0001  
DM6551 0303  
0304  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6553 0000  
Unit # 00  
CPM1: Peripheral port connection through a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6650 0001  
Host link mode  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6651 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6653 0000  
Unit # 00  
Connecting to a CPM2C  
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on  
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and  
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using  
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,  
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-  
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.  
Port connecting to PT  
PC Setup  
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111 Built-in RS-232C port settings  
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111  
Peripheral port settings  
Built-in RS-232C port settings  
Peripheral port settings  
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118  
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114  
Peripheral port  
CPM2C-CN111  
CPM2C  
CPM2C  
CPM2C  
CS1W-CN118  
CS1W-CN114  
Peripheral port  
RS-232C port  
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)  
RS-232C port  
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)  
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H  
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on  
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the  
PC Setup area (data memory) effective.  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CQM1  
CQM1H  
RS-232C port communication condition setting  
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made  
in PC Setup effective.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.  
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A  
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown  
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.  
Set the Communications  
switch to OFF (down  
position).  
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C  
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown  
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.  
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the  
peripheral port and RS-232C port.  
S Connecting PT to peripheral port  
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port  
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings  
is connected to the peripheral port.)  
SW1: OFF  
SW2: ON  
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port  
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)  
SW1: OFF  
SW2: OFF  
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter  
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in  
the following diagram.  
CPM1-  
CIF01  
CPM1  
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-E (-V1)  
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU, or the RS-232C port of the  
communication board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be  
made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connect-  
ing to a peripheral port.  
PC Setup  
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-  
tions for the PC Setup area. Since the settings shown below are the PC default  
settings for the CPU, no change to the PC Setup is necessary as long as the  
communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps.  
Item  
Communication speed  
Stop bits  
Setting at Host  
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)  
2 stop bits  
Even  
Parity  
Data length  
ASCII 7 bits  
00  
Unit No. for the host link  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link  
Method (page 160). When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps, the PC  
Setup of the CPU need to be changed.  
Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming  
Console), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Pro-  
grammer) to the CPU.  
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual  
(W339-E1-j).  
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,  
2 stop bits, even parity  
160  
8000  
0000  
0007  
0000  
Communication speed: 9600 bps.  
Communication speed: 19200 bps.  
Unit #00  
161  
166  
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,  
2 stop bits, even parity  
144  
8000  
0000  
0007  
0000  
Communication speed: 9600 bps.  
Communication speed: 19200 bps.  
Unit #00  
145  
150  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is  
connected to.  
RUN  
ERR/ALM  
INH  
PRPHL/COMM  
SYSMAC CS1G  
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER  
CPU42  
Peripheral port  
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)  
OPEN  
This is used mainly for  
connection to the  
Programming Device.  
(This also supports the  
RS-232C unit connection.)  
Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.  
MCPWR  
OPEN  
BUSY  
Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.  
PERIPHERAL  
RS-232 port  
This is used mainly for  
connection to the  
RS-232C unit.  
(This also supports the  
CX-Programmer.)  
PORT  
Connecting to CS1-series Serial Communications Board  
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series  
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit  
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or  
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of  
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the  
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of  
the STUP command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings  
are shown.  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data  
length 7 bits  
DM32000  
DM32001  
DM32010  
8000  
0000  
0007  
0000  
0000  
Communication speed 9600 bps.  
Communication speed 19200 bps.  
Transmit delay time 0 ms.  
DM32011  
DM32002  
DM32006  
DM32012  
DM32016  
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link  
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link (1:1) function built in.  
With CQM1H PCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1:1  
NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected  
by the NT link (1:1) method by installing a Communication Board.  
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the  
connections.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:1)  
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.  
CPUs Connectable with  
CPUs with Built-in  
NT Link Function  
Connectable  
to  
Expansion  
PC Series  
Communication  
(*1)  
Board  
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
---  
C200HS  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HE (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HG  
(-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
X200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
C200HX (-Z)E  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
CPM1-10CDR-j  
CPM1-20CDR-j  
CPM1-30CDR-j  
---  
C series  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
CPM1A-10CDj-j  
CPM1A-20CDj-j  
CPM1A-30CDj-j  
CPM1A-40CDj-j  
CPM1  
CPM2A-30CDjj-j  
CPM2A-40CDjj-j  
CPM2A-60CDjj-j  
---  
CPM2A  
CPM2C  
(*3)  
(*3)  
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j  
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j  
---  
---  
CQM1-CPU41-EV1  
CQM1-CPU42-EV1  
CQM1-CPU43-EV1  
CQM1-CPU44-EV1  
CQM1-CPU45-EV1  
CQM1  
(*4)  
(*4)  
CQM1H-CPU21-E  
CQM1H-CPU51-E  
CQM1H-CPU61-E  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
CQM1H  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
---  
---  
---  
---  
CV500  
(*5)  
CV series  
CV1000  
CV2000  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1 series  
CVM1  
SRM1  
(*5)  
CompoBus/S  
master  
---  
SRM1-C02-V1  
control unit  
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:  
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.  
*2 A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.  
*3 Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01  
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.  
*4 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.  
*5 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.  
Reference: CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.  
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to  
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method  
(page 72) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75).  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Settings at The Host  
The setting methods for each unit are as follows:  
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,  
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or SRM1  
PC Setup Area Settings  
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming  
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and  
port.  
Host Model  
Word #  
Writing Value  
Setting  
RS-232C port of C200HS,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A,  
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1  
DM6645  
(*1)  
Use NT link  
(1:1)  
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
4000  
DM6555  
(*2)  
Port 1 of CQM1H  
(*1)  
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CPM1  
DM6550  
DM6650  
*1 RS-232C port of the Communication Board  
*2 RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board  
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for  
the PC which is used.  
Connecting to a CPM2C  
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on  
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and  
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using  
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,  
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-  
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.  
Port connecting to PT  
PC Setup  
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111 Built-in RS-232C port settings  
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111  
Peripheral port settings  
Built-in RS-232C port settings  
Peripheral port settings  
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118  
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114  
Peripheral port  
CPM2C-CN111  
CPM2C  
CPM2C  
CPM2C  
CS1W-CN118  
CS1W-CN114  
Peripheral port  
RS-232C port  
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)  
RS-232C port  
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)  
Setting the DIP Switches on the Front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1,  
CQM1H  
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the  
PC Setup area (data memory) effective.  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CQM1  
CQM1H  
RS-232C port communication condition setting  
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings  
made in PC Setup effective.  
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A  
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown  
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.  
Set the Communications  
switch to OFF (down  
position).  
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C  
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown  
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.  
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the  
peripheral port and RS-232C port.  
S Connecting PT to peripheral port  
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port  
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings  
is connected to the peripheral port.)  
SW1: OFF  
SW2: ON  
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port  
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)  
SW1: OFF  
SW2: OFF  
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter  
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in  
the following diagram.  
CPM1-  
CIF01  
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-EVj)  
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.  
I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-232C.  
DIP switch setting (SW3)  
6
5
4
3
2
1
Set SW3 to use NT link  
(ON, right side).  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
When using the CVM1/CV series, CPU execution processing (execution control  
2) in the PC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are the  
CS1-series CS1G/H and the C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, and  
SRM1 only. With the CS1-series PCs, it is possible to connect a 1:N NT Link us-  
ing a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit.  
Check the model and series of the PC as well as the model of Serial Commu-  
nications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.  
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:N)  
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.  
CPUs Connectable with  
CPUs with Built-in  
NT Link Function  
Connectable  
to  
PC Series  
Communications Board  
(*1)  
or Unit  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/  
45-EV1  
CS1G  
CS1H  
45-EV1  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/  
66/67-EV1  
CS1 series  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/  
66/67-EV1  
(*2)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE  
(-Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HG  
(-Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C series  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX  
(-Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
(*3)  
CQM1H-CPU51  
---  
CQM1H  
SRM1  
(*3)  
CQM1H-CPU61  
CompoBus/S  
Master  
Control Unit  
SRM1-C02-V2  
---  
*1 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or  
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.  
*2 One of the following Communication Boards is required:  
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)  
*3 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.  
Reference: The -V1 versions of CS1-series PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well  
as the standard 1:N NT Link. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link can be  
used in earlier versions of CS1-series PCs by installing a new version of Serial  
Communications Board or Unit. For details, refer to Using the High-speed NT  
Link (1:N) Method (page 75).  
Settings at the Host  
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.  
Connecting a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1  
PC Setup Area Settings  
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and  
port.  
Writing  
Value  
Connection to  
Word #  
Setting  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1  
Built-in RS-232C port  
DM6645  
Use NT link (1:N)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
*1  
j = highest unit number of  
Communication Board port A  
DM6555  
DM6550  
5j00  
the connected PTs (1 to 7)  
*2  
CQM1H port 1  
(*3)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
*1  
Communication Board port B  
*1 RS-232C port on the Communications Board  
*2 RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board  
*3 When using a C200HE (-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.  
Refer to the PC’s operation manual for details on changing PC Setup settings.  
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must  
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area (data  
memory) effective.  
RS-232C port communication condition setting  
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC  
Setup effective.  
Connecting to CS1-series CPU Units  
CS1-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPUjj-E(V1)  
The PT is connected to the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or an RS-232C  
port on a Communications Board. It can also be connected to the peripheral port  
on the CPU Unit, but a CS1W-CN118 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable must be  
used.  
PC Setup  
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-  
tions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be  
used.  
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
160  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
(*1)  
161  
166  
0000 to 0009  
Communications baud rate (standard)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
000j  
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.  
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between  
0000 and 0009 Hex.  
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
144  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
(*1)  
145  
150  
0000 to 0009  
Communications baud rate (standard)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
000j  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.  
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between  
0000 and 0009 Hex.  
When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2-5 to the built-in RS-232C port,  
for example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.  
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Con-  
sole), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Program-  
mer) to the CPU.  
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual  
(W339-E1-j).  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is  
connected to.  
RUN  
ERR/ALM  
INH  
PRPHL/COMM  
SYSMAC CS1G  
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER  
CPU42  
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)  
OPEN  
Peripheral port  
Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.  
This is used mainly for  
connection to the  
Programming Device.  
(This also supports the  
RS-232C unit connection.)  
MCPWR  
OPEN  
BUSY  
Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.  
PERIPHERAL  
RS-232 port  
This is used mainly for  
connection to the  
RS-232C unit.  
(This also supports the  
CX-Programmer.)  
PORT  
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board  
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series  
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21  
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings  
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-  
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the  
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,  
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP  
command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are  
shown.  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
Port 1  
DM32000  
DM32001  
Port 2  
DM32010  
DM32011  
(*1)  
0000 to 0009  
Communications baud rate  
(standard)  
j = The largest model number of  
the connected PT (0 – 7)  
DM32006  
DM32016  
000j  
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.  
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between  
0000 and 0009 Hex.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1, for example, set the  
value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 0000 Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to  
DM32006.  
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit  
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch  
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that  
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.  
SCU21  
RDY  
ERH  
SD2  
RD2  
RUN  
ERC  
SD1  
RD1  
UNIT  
Set the unit number to 0 through F so  
that it will not overlap with the numbers  
used in other units.  
No.  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU  
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-  
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the  
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,  
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP  
command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are  
shown.  
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
Port 1  
Port 2  
m+10  
m
(*1)  
m+1  
m+11  
0000 to 0009  
Communications baud rate  
(standard)  
j = The largest model number of  
the connected PT (0 - 7)  
m+6  
m+16  
000j  
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.  
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between  
0000 and 0009 Hex.  
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Only the -V1 versions of OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high-  
speed 1:N NT Link directly. Other CS1-series PCs can use the high-speed 1:N  
NT Link indirectly through a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit. (If a  
Serial Communications Unit is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1”  
suffix can be connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)  
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Serial Communications  
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an  
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
CPU Units with Built-in  
NT Link Function  
CPUs Connectable only through a  
Serial Communication Board or Unit  
(*1)  
(*2)  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)  
(*1)  
(*2)  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)  
*1 The high-speed 1:N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the CPU  
Unit of a CS1-series PC without the -V1 suffix.  
*2 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or  
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Settings at the Host  
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.  
Connecting CS1-series CPU Units  
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-EV1  
PC Setup  
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-  
tions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be  
used.  
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
160  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
161  
166  
000A  
Communications baud rate (high-speed)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
000j  
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H  
Word #  
144  
Writing Value  
8200  
Settings  
NT link (1:N) mode  
145  
150  
000A  
Communications baud rate (high-speed)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
000j  
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in  
RS-232C port, for example, set the value 8200 Hex to word 160, 000A Hex to  
word 161, and 0005 Hex to word 166.  
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Con-  
sole), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Program-  
mer) to the CPU.  
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual  
(W339-E1-j).  
Reference: When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the com-  
munications baud rate to 115,200 bps.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is  
connected to.  
RUN  
ERR/ALM  
INH  
PRPHL/COMM  
SYSMAC CS1G  
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER  
CPU42  
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)  
OPEN  
Peripheral port  
Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.  
This is used mainly for  
connection to the  
Programming Device.  
(This also supports  
connection of RS-232C  
devices.)  
MCPWR  
OPEN  
BUSY  
Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-  
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the  
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.  
PERIPHERAL  
RS-232 port  
This is used mainly for  
connection of RS-232C  
devices.  
(This also supports the  
connection of  
CX-Programmer.)  
PORT  
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board  
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series  
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21  
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-  
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and  
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.  
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings  
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-  
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the  
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,  
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP  
command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are  
shown.  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing  
Settings  
Value  
Port 1  
DM32000  
DM32001  
Port 2  
DM32010  
DM32011  
8200  
NT link (1:N) mode  
000A  
Communications baud rate (high-speed)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
DM32006  
DM32016  
000j  
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 1,  
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 000A Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to  
DM32006.  
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit  
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21  
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-  
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and  
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch  
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that  
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.  
SCU21  
RDY  
ERH  
SD2  
RD2  
RUN  
ERC  
SD1  
RD1  
UNIT  
Set the unit number to 0 through F so  
that it will not overlap with the numbers  
used in other units.  
No.  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU  
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-  
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the  
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,  
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP  
command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are  
shown.  
Word m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)  
Allocation DM area (CH)  
Writing  
Settings  
Value  
Port 1  
Port 2  
m
m+10  
8200  
NT link (1:N) mode  
m+1  
m+6  
m+11  
m+16  
000A  
Communications baud rate (high-speed)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 - 7)  
000j  
When Using the Memory  
Link Method  
In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer  
with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.  
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to create  
a program for the memory link at the host side.  
The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory  
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting  
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the follow-  
ing table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C by the  
memory switch. (page 165).  
Item  
Input/Output port  
Communication speed  
Data bits length  
Stop bits length  
Parity  
Settings at the host  
RS-232C  
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.  
7 bits, 8 bits  
1 bits, 2 bits  
None, even, odd  
Flow control  
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports  
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT31/NT31C and  
the host is described here.  
Host link unit/CPU  
NT31/NT31C  
SYSMAC  
C-series PC,  
CVM1/CV-series PC,  
PLC, SRM1  
Serial port A (RS-232C, 9-pin type)  
Serial port B (RS-232C, 25-pin type)  
9-pin connector  
9-pin connector  
or 25-pin  
connector  
Cable with RS-232C connectors  
Recommended Connector Cable  
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended  
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some  
units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.  
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.  
Name  
Model  
Remarks  
Delivered with  
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H  
C-series CQM1,  
C200HS,  
9-pin  
XM2A-0901  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs  
CV500-LK201  
Made by OMRON  
Connector  
C500-LK203  
25-pin  
CV500-LK201  
C200H-LK201-EV1  
XM24-2501  
DB-25P  
Made by OMRON  
25-pin  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
C-series CQM1,  
C200HS,  
9-pin  
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E,  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs  
CV500-LK201  
XM2S-0911  
Made by OMRON  
9-pin  
Made by OMRON  
XM2S-0913  
Connector  
hood  
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H  
9-pin  
Made by OMRON  
XM2S-0911-E  
C500-LK203  
25-pin  
Made by OMRON  
CV500-LK201  
C200H-LK201-EV1  
XM2S-2511  
DB-C2-J9  
25-pin  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
AWG28 5P  
Multi-core shielded cable  
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.  
Multi-core shielded cable  
IFVV-SB  
Cable  
CO-MA-VV-SB  
Made by Hitachi Cable,  
Ltd.  
5P 28AWG  
Note After connecting a communication cable, always secure it with the screws.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
OMRON Cables with Connectors  
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link meth-  
od, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.  
Model  
XW2Z-200S  
XW2Z-500S  
XW2Z-200T  
XW2Z-500T  
Cable Length  
Connector Specification  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
9-pin 25 pin  
9-pin 9-pin  
When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the  
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are avail-  
able.  
Model  
Cable Length  
Connector Specification  
9-pin 25 pin  
CV500-CN228  
XW2Z-S002  
2 m  
2 m  
9-pin 9 pin  
When a connection is made at serial port B in other than the memory link meth-  
od, OMRON cables with connectors shown are available.  
Model  
XW2Z-200P  
XW2Z-500P  
XW2Z-200S  
XW2Z-500S  
Cable Length  
Connector Specification  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
25-pin 25 pin  
25-pin 9-pin  
Note The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.  
Wiring for a Host Link  
Unit (25-pin) Connection  
Applicable units: C200H-LK201-EV1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C500-LK203  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)  
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:  
XW2Z-200S (9-pin 25-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-500S (9-pin 25-pin, 5 m)  
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:  
XW2Z-200P (25-pin 25-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-500P (25-pin 25-pin, 5 m)  
CVM1/CV-series host link units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a  
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communica-  
tion port 2). When using communication port 2, refer to Wiring for Other Connec-  
tions (Other Than the Memory Link Method) (page81).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Serial Port A  
1
14  
NT31/NT31C  
PC (host link unit)  
6
1
Pin  
Pin  
Abbreviation  
FG  
Abbreviation  
number  
Connector  
hood  
Shielding wire  
number  
1
FG  
2
1
2
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
3
4
5
SD  
RD  
RS  
RS-232C  
interface  
3
4
5
RS-232C  
interface  
CS  
*
6
7
8
+5V  
5G  
6
7
8
9
5G  
(9-pin type)  
9
5
ER  
(25-pin type)  
13  
25  
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be  
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.  
Serial Port B  
NT31/NT31C  
PC (host link unit)  
Pin  
Pin  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation  
number  
Shielding wire  
number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
FG  
1
2
1
2
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
14  
1
14  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
3
4
5
RS-232C  
interface  
3
4
5
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
interface  
*
6
7
8
SG  
SG  
6
7
8
TRM  
9
10  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
11  
20  
ER  
12  
13  
14  
(25-pin  
type)  
SDA (–)  
RDA (–)  
15  
16  
23  
24  
RSB (+)  
13  
25  
13  
25  
RSA (–)  
25  
(25-pin type)  
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be  
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.  
Wiring for Other  
Connections  
Applicable units :  
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)  
CS1W-SCU21  
CPM1-10CDR-j  
CPM1A-10CDj-j  
CPM1A-30CDj-j  
CPM2A-30CDj-j  
CPM2A-60CDj-j  
CPM1-20CDR-j  
CPM1A-20CDj-j  
CPM1A-40CDj-j  
CPM2A-40CDj-j  
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j  
CQM1-CPU21-E  
CQM1-CPU41-EV1  
CQM1-CPU43-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU11  
CQM1-CPU42-EV1  
CQM1-CPU44-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CUP67-E(V1)  
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
SRM1-C02-V2  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:  
XW2Z-200T (9-pin 9-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-500T (9-pin 9-pin, 5 m)  
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:  
XW2Z-200S (25-pin 9-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-500S (25-pin 9-pin, 5 m)  
CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected by  
any connection method.  
Serial Port A  
6
6
NT31/NT31C  
PC (Host link unit)  
1
1
Pin  
Pin  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation  
number  
number  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
FG  
SD  
1
2
1
2
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
RD  
RS  
3
4
5
RS-232C  
interface  
3
4
5
RS-232C  
interface  
CS  
+5V  
*
6
7
8
9
DSR  
ER  
6
7
8
9
SG  
SG  
(9-pin type)  
9
9
5
5
(9-pin type)  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Serial Port B  
NT31/NT31C  
PC (Host link unit)  
Abbreviation  
FG  
Shielding wire  
1
14  
FG  
1
2
1
2
6
1
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
3
4
5
3
4
5
*
SG  
6
7
8
9
6
7
8
SG  
TRM  
9
10  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
(9-pin type)  
11  
12  
13  
14  
9
5
SDA (–)  
RDA (–)  
15  
16  
13  
25  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA (–)  
(25-pin type)  
* In case 0V is set for those unit which has CTS setting selector, it is not necessary  
to shorten between RS and CS.  
Wiring for a Memory Link  
Connection  
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:  
CV500-CN228 (9-pin25-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin9-pin, 2 m)  
Serial Port A  
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.  
PC (Host link unit)  
NT31/NT31C  
6
Abbreviation  
1
Abbreviation Pin number  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD  
RS-232C  
RD  
RS-232C  
connector  
connector  
RS  
CS  
SG  
SG  
(9-pin type)  
9
5
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host  
Section 4-1  
Serial Port B  
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.  
NT31/NT31C  
PC (Host link unit)  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Shielding wire  
1
14  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
1
2
SD  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
RS-232C  
connector  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
RS-232C  
/422A/485  
connector  
3
4
5
SG  
6
7
8
TRM  
9
10  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
11  
12  
13  
14  
SDA (–)  
RDA (–)  
15  
16  
13  
25  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA (–)  
(25-pin type)  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port  
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.  
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . . .  
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . .  
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .  
86  
87  
88  
92  
97  
99  
100  
101  
117  
121  
122  
125  
127  
128  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the  
RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.  
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs  
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary  
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-  
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Con-  
nection Manual (V060-E1-j).  
Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port  
of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A con-  
vertor unit (page 88).  
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.  
PT  
Host  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
convertor unit  
RS-422A cable  
(max. 500 m)  
RS-232C  
cable  
(max. 2 m)  
Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port of  
the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A conver-  
tor unit (page 88).  
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.  
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method of  
type RS-485.  
PT  
Host  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
convertor unit  
RS-485 cable  
(max. 500 m)  
RS-232C  
cable  
(max. 2 m)  
Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the  
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an  
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 92).  
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) meth-  
od.  
PT  
Host  
RS-232C/RS422A  
convertor unit  
RS-422A cable  
(max. total length  
500 m)  
RS-232C  
cable  
(max. 2 m)  
Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-232C  
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A  
convertor unit (page 92).  
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed).  
PT  
Host  
RS-232C/RS422A  
convertor unit  
RS-485 cable  
(max. total length  
500 m)  
RS-232C  
cable  
(max. 2 m)  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must  
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays  
and communication failures.  
PC  
(At termination)  
PC  
PC  
Relay terminal block  
Relay terminal block  
Max. 2 m  
NT31  
NT31C  
(Not at  
termination)  
NT31  
(Not at  
termination)  
NT31  
NT31C  
NT31  
NT31  
NT31C  
NT31  
NT31  
(At  
(Not at  
termination)  
termination)  
Example of Good Connection  
Examples of Bad Connections  
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.  
Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or high-speed) instead to  
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) method  
(page 72) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) method (page 75).  
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings  
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the  
host side RS-232C.  
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.  
Method  
Host link  
Reference  
Host Link Method (page 54)  
NT link (1:1)  
NT link (1:N)  
NT Link (1:1) method (page 67)  
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 72)  
High-speed NT link (1:N) Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75)  
Memory link Memory Link Method (page 78)  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Settings at the  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
Convertor Unit  
(NT-AL001)  
When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using an  
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as fol-  
lows.  
Example: the terminal resistor is active,  
RS-422A, NT link (1:N).  
ON  
omRon  
NT-AL001  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)  
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to ON (to  
activate the built-in terminal resistor).  
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to  
OFF (to inactivate the built-in terminal resistor).  
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)  
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).  
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).  
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)  
For host link or NT link (1:1), set both of these switches to  
OFF. (Always send)  
For NT link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.  
(Sends when CS is H)  
Note Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the unit.  
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at  
the Host  
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT31/NT31C and  
the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described here.  
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between  
the RS-232C and RS-422A communication methods.  
Host link unit/CPU  
NT31/NT31C  
Serial port B  
(RS-422A/485,  
25-pin type)  
SYSMAC  
C-series PC,  
CVM1/CV-series PC, SRM1  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
9-pin connector or  
25-pin connector  
25-pin connector  
RS-422A/485 cable  
(max. length: 500 m)  
RS-232C cable  
with connectors  
RS-422A terminal block  
9-pin connector  
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed) can be used.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-422A  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Shielding wire  
1
14  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
1
2
8
6
4
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
7
5
3
1
RD  
3
RS  
4
CS  
5
6
SG  
7
NT-AL001 side  
8
TRM  
9
Pin number Abbreviation  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6
5
4
3
1
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SDB (+)  
RS-422A  
terminal  
block  
Functional  
ground  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the  
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.  
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-485  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
1
2
14  
8
6
4
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
7
5
3
1
RD  
3
RS  
4
CS  
5
6
SG  
7
NT-AL001 side  
8
TRM  
9
Pin number Abbreviation  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6
5
4
3
1
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SDB (+)  
RS-422A  
terminal  
block  
Functional  
ground  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
Shielding wire  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the  
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.  
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed) can be used.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-232C  
Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit (25-pin)  
Applicable units:  
C200H-LK201-V1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C500-LK203  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)  
Cables with connectors that can be used:  
XW2Z-200S (9-pin 25-pin, 2 m)  
XW2Z-500S (9-pin 25-pin, 5 m)  
CVM1/CV-series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a  
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communica-  
tion port 2). When using the communication port, refer to Wiring for Connections  
other than Memory Link (page 90).  
PC (host link unit) side  
NT-AL001 side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
1
Abbreviation Pin number  
FG  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
14  
hood  
Shielding wire  
6
1
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
RS-232C  
connector  
RS-232C  
connector  
4
5
6
7
SG  
8
SG  
(9-pin type)  
9
5
20  
ER  
(25-pin type)  
13  
25  
Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link  
Applicable units:  
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)  
CS1W-SCU21  
CPM1-10CDR-  
j
CPM1-20CDR-  
j
CPM1A-10CDj-  
CPM1A-30CDj-  
j
j
CPM1A-20CDj-  
CPM1A-40CDj-  
j
j
CPM2A-30CD  
j
j
j
-
j
j
CPM2A-40CD  
j
j
-
j
CPM2A-60CD  
j
-
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-20  
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CQM1-CPU21-E  
CQM1-CPU41-EV1  
CQM1-CPU43-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU11  
CQM1-CPU42-EV1  
CQM1-CPU44-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
C200HS-CPU21-E  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HE-CPU32-E  
C200HG-CPU33-E  
C200HG-CPU53-E  
C200HX-CPU34-E  
C200HX-CPU54-E  
C200HE-CPU32-ZE  
C200HG-CPU33-ZE  
C200HG-CPU53-ZE  
C200HX-CPU34-ZE  
C200HX-CPU54-ZE  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
SRM1-C02-V2  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
C200HE-CPU42-E  
C200HG-CPU43-E  
C200HG-CPU63-E  
C200HX-CPU44-E  
C200HX-CPU64-E  
C200HE-CPU42-ZE  
C200HG-CPU43-ZE  
C200HG-CPU63-ZE  
C200HX-CPU44-ZE  
C200HX-CPU64-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:  
For host link and 1:1 NT Link only (+5 V power wire attached)  
SJ45007-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)  
SSJ45007-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)  
For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)  
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)  
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)  
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)  
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj can-  
not be connected by any connection method.  
NT-AL001 side  
PC side  
6
1
6
1
Pin number  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Abbreviation  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
FG  
FG  
hood  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
(+5V)  
RS-232C  
connector  
RS-232C  
connector  
SG  
SG  
Shielding wire  
9
(9-pin type)  
(9-pin type)  
9
5
5
When there is no +5 V output at the PC side  
When there is +5 V output at the PC side  
When using host link or NT link (1:1)  
When using NT link (1:N)  
When using the host link or NT link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS termi-  
nals at the PC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals at the NT-  
AL001 side open).  
When using the NT link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at the  
NT-AL001 and PC sides.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
If there is +5 V output at the PC side, no external power supply is required for  
the NT-AL001.  
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection  
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.  
Host side  
Abbreviation  
NT-AL001 side  
6
1
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD  
RD  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
RS-232C  
connector  
RS-232C  
connector  
RS  
CS  
(+5V)  
SG  
SG  
(9-pin type)  
Shielding wire  
9
5
No +5 V output is at the host side  
A +5 V output is present at the host side  
Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NT-AL001,  
supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NT-  
AL001 is required.  
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at  
the Host  
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple  
NT31/NT31Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connec-  
tion is described here.  
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between  
the RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communication methods.  
Host link unit/CPU  
NT31/NT31C  
CS1G/H  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
Serial port B  
(RS-422A/485,  
25-pin type)  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
convertor unit  
(NT-AL001)  
9-pin connector  
25-pin connector  
Relay terminal block  
Max. 2 m  
RS-232C cable with  
connectors  
RS-422A terminal 9-pin connector  
block  
RS-422A/485 cable  
(max. total length: 500 m)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connecting an  
NT31/NT31C and  
NT-AL001 (RS-422A)  
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-  
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-422A  
NT31/NT31C side  
1
14  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
Shielding wire  
FG  
hood  
8
6
4
2
1
2
7
5
3
1
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
CS  
5
6
SG  
7
NT-AL001 side  
8
TRM  
9
Pin number Abbreviation  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6
5
4
3
1
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
RS-422A  
terminal  
block  
RDB (+)  
Functional  
ground  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
Next PT  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the  
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connecting an  
NT31/NT31C and  
NT-AL001 (RS-485)  
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-  
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-485  
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
8
6
4
2
1
2
7
5
3
1
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
SD  
RD  
3
RS  
4
CS  
5
6
SG  
7
NT-AL001 side  
8
TRM  
9
Pin number Abbreviation  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6
5
4
3
1
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
RS-422A  
terminal  
block  
SDB (+)  
Functional  
ground  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
Next PT  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the  
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connection between  
NT31/NT31C Units  
(RS-422A)  
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-  
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-422A  
:
1
1
14  
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
FG  
hood  
1
2
1
2
SD  
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
3
RD  
RS  
4
4
RS  
CS  
5
5
CS  
6
6
SG  
7
7
SG  
8
8
:
TRM  
9
9
TRM  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
RDB (+)  
RDB (+)  
RDB (+)  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
(25-pin type)  
(25-pin type)  
*2  
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C  
(marked : in the figure above) only.  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connec-  
tor hood and the shielding at one side only.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Connection between  
NT31/NT31C Units  
(RS-485)  
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-  
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-485  
:
NT31/NT31C side  
NT31/NT31C side  
1
1
14  
14  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
FG  
FG  
hood  
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
SD  
SD  
RD  
RD  
3
3
RS  
RS  
4
4
CS  
CS  
5
5
6
6
SG  
SG  
7
7
8
8
:
TRM  
TRM  
9
9
RDB (+)  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
(25-pin type)  
*2  
Make the connection pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C (marked  
:
i
n
t
h
e
f
i
g
u
r
e
a
b
o
v
e
)
.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connec-  
tor hood and the shielding at the one side only.  
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
NT-AL001  
RS-232C  
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications Board,  
CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Com-  
munications Board.  
Applicable PCs:  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:  
For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)  
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)  
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)  
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)  
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)  
NT-AL001 side  
PC side  
6
6
1
1
Abbreviation Pin number  
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
Connector  
FG  
FG  
hood  
hood  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
+5V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-232C  
connector  
RS-232C  
connector  
SG  
SG  
9
9
(9-pin type)  
(9-pin type)  
5
5
Since the CS1G/H, CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have a +5 V output,  
no external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.  
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals  
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-232C  
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recom-  
mended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with one  
connector and connector hood.  
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.  
Name  
Model  
Remarks  
Delivered with  
CS1-series CS1G/H  
C-series CQM1, C200HS,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
9-pin type  
XM2A-0901  
Made by OMRON  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs  
CV500-LK201  
Connector  
C500-LK203  
25-pin type  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C200H-LK201-V1  
XM2A-2501  
DB-25P  
Made by OMRON  
25-pin type  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Name  
Model  
XM2S-0911  
XM2S-0913  
Remarks  
9-pin type  
Delivered with  
C-series CQM1, C200HS,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs  
CV500-LK201  
Made by OMRON  
Made by OMRON 9-pin  
---  
Connector  
hood  
XM2S-0911-E Made by OMRON 9-pin  
CS1 series CS1G/CS1H  
C500-LK203  
25-pin type  
XM2S-2511  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C200H-LK201-V1  
Made by OMRON  
25-pin type  
DB-C2-J9  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
AWG28 5P  
Multi-core shielded cable  
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.  
---  
---  
IFVV-SB  
Cable  
Multi-core shielded cable  
Made by Hitachi, Ltd.  
CO-MA-VV-SB  
5P 28AWG  
Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON  
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PC, use the OMRON cables with connec-  
tors indicated in the table below.  
Model  
Cable Length  
Connector Specification  
9-pin 25-pin  
XW2Z-200S  
XW2Z-500S  
XW2Z-200T  
XW2Z-500T  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
1 m  
Host link, NT link (1:1)  
9-pin 9-pin  
Host link, NT link (1:1)  
9-pin 9-pin  
SJ45007-102  
SJ45007-202  
XW2Z-070T-1  
XW2Z-200T-1  
SJ46006-102  
SJ46006-202  
Host link, NT link (1:1)  
2 m  
0.7 m  
2 m  
+5 V power supply wire attached  
(Use when the PC does not have a +5 V output.)  
9-pin 9-pin  
Host link, NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)  
+5 V power supplied from PC  
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)  
1 m  
9-pin 9-pin  
Host link, NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)  
2 m  
+5 V power supplied from PC  
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)  
Note The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed  
this load.  
After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.  
Recommended connectors, cables and crimp terminals for RS-422A/485  
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the  
recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied  
with one connector and connector hood.  
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port  
Section 5-1  
Name  
Model  
Maker  
Remarks  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
XM2A-2501  
Made by OMRON  
C500-LK203  
Connector  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
DB-25P F-N  
XM2S-2511  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
Made by OMRON  
C500-LK203  
Connector  
hood  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
DB-C2-J9  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
Tachii Electric  
Wire Co., Ltd.  
Cable  
TKVVBS4P-03  
1.25-N3A  
(fork type)  
Japan Solderless  
Terminal MFG  
Recommended cable size:  
AWG22 to 18  
(0.3 to 0.75 mm )  
Crimp  
terminals  
Y1.25-3.5L  
(fork type)  
2
Molex Inc.  
The terminal screws of the NT-AL001 are M3 specification. When wiring,  
use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening  
torque of 0.5 N@m.  
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.  
Examples of applicable terminals  
Round type  
Fork type  
6.2 mm or less  
6.2 mm or less  
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications  
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting  
terminal (TRM).  
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at  
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.  
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal  
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting termi-  
nals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 . When  
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between  
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.  
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at  
the end of the cable.  
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting  
is ineffective.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s con-  
nector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the  
Cable, page 267.  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
-
Terminal resistor setting  
-
-
9
TRM  
10  
11  
12  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
-
-
-
25  
-
Pin Nos. 9 and 10  
Function  
Terminal resistance is applied.  
Shorted  
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an  
RS-422A/485 cable.  
Terminal resistance is not applied.  
Open  
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C  
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.  
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the  
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PC, etc.) is OFF.  
Reference: S The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.  
+
10 (RDB)  
16 (RDA)  
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between  
+ (RDB) and (RDA).  
Terminal resistor (120 )  
9 (TRM)  
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT-AL001-E, refer to Settings  
at the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001-E) (page 88).  
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the  
RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following meth-  
ods.  
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs  
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary  
RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-  
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or Multi Vendor Connection  
Manual (V060-E1-j).  
Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are con-  
nected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 117).  
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.  
PT  
Host  
RS-422A cable  
(max. 500 m)  
Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are connected  
by an RS-485 cable (page 121).  
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed) of type RS-485.  
PT  
Host  
RS-485 cable  
(max. 500 m)  
Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the  
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 122).  
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed).  
PT  
Host  
RS-422A cable  
(max. total length 500 m)  
Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-485  
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 125).  
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method  
(standard or high-speed).  
PT  
Host  
RS-485 cable  
(max. total length 500 m)  
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must  
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays  
and communication failures.  
PC  
(At termination)  
PC  
PC  
Relay terminal block  
Relay terminal block  
Max. 2 m  
NT31  
NT31C  
(Not at  
termination)  
NT31  
(Not at  
termination)  
NT31  
NT31C  
NT31  
NT31  
NT31C  
NT31  
NT31  
(At  
(Not at  
termination)  
termination)  
Example of Good Connection  
Examples of Bad Connections  
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.  
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to  
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) Method  
(page 113) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) Method (page 115).  
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings  
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the  
RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C, and the settings to be made at the host,  
are described here.  
When Using the Host Link Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A/485 type host link  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
function built in. With the CS1-series and CQM1H, the host link method can be  
used by installing a serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/  
HE(-Z)E devices have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link  
method by installing a communication board.  
With the CPM2A and CPM2C, an RS-422A type of 1:1 NT Link can be created  
through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.  
Check the model and series of the PC and the type of the installed Board or Unit  
before making a connection.  
The host units featuring the RS-422A/485 type host link function and can be con-  
nected to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table  
below.  
Units with Built-in Host Link Function  
CPUs Connectable with  
Host Link Units or Expansion  
Communication Board  
Connectable  
to  
PC Series  
Host Link Unit /  
CPU  
Communication Board  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1  
CS1G  
CS1H  
CS1 series  
CS1W-SCB41-E  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000H  
C2000H  
3G2A6-LK202-EV1  
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E  
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC  
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E  
C200HS  
C200HE  
C200HE-ZE  
C200HG  
C200HG-ZE  
C200HX  
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE  
C200H-LK202-V1  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE  
C200HX-ZE  
C200HE-CPU32/42-E  
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE  
C200HE  
C200HE-ZE  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E  
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE  
C200HG  
C200HG-ZE  
C200HW-COM03/06-EV1  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E  
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE C200HX-ZE  
C200HX  
C series  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000H  
C2000H  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C500-LK203  
C1000H-CPU01-EV1  
C2000H-CPU01-EV1  
C1000H  
C2000H  
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-  
j
+CPM1-CIF11  
CPM1  
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-  
j
+CPM1-CIF11  
CPM2A-30/40/60CDj-  
j
+CPM1-CIF11  
CPM2A  
(Peripheral port connection)  
(*1)  
CPM2C-10/20 j-  
j
j
j
j
j
j
CPM2C  
CQM1H  
CV500  
CQM1H-SCB41  
CV500-LK201  
CQM1H-CPU51/61  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV series  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000  
CV2000  
(*2)  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1 se-  
ries  
CV500-LK201  
CVM1  
(*2)  
SRM1  
SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11  
SRM1  
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11  
RS-422A Adapter to connect.  
*2: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.  
The host link method cannot be used when an NT31/NT31C is connected using  
RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Settings at the Host  
When using the RS-422A type host link method, the settings shown below must  
be made at the host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be  
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).  
Item  
Setting at Host  
I/O port  
RS-422A  
(*1)  
Communications speed  
Transfer code  
Parity  
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.  
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits  
Even  
(*2)  
1-to-1/1-to-N  
Instruction level  
Unit #  
1-to-N  
Level 1, 2, 3  
00  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting  
the Host Link Method (page 158).  
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually  
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.  
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.  
Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit  
C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E  
Backplane mounting type: C200H-LK201-V1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the  
setting value window agree with the following:  
LK201  
XMT  
RUN  
RCV  
ERROR  
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)  
Set these switches to 0.  
SW1  
SW3  
SW2  
0
0
5
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)  
SW4  
Set this switch to 2.  
2
@ Communications speed (SW3)  
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.  
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)  
Set this switch to ON.  
Terminator  
ON  
1-to-1 (ON)  
1-to-N (OFF)  
OFF  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)  
Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Setting the Front Switches  
Mode  
selector  
Host Local  
@ Mode selector (key switch)  
Set this to Host link.  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-422A.  
I/O port  
8
RS-422A  
7
RS-232C  
6
SW1  
5
4
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)  
3
Synchronization  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).  
2
Internal  
1
External  
ON  
@ Synchronization (selector switch)  
Set this to Internal.  
Terminator  
8
7
OFF  
6
ON  
SW2  
5
4
@ Communications speed  
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
CTS  
3
2
0V  
Set these switches to 0010 to select  
19200 bps.  
External  
1
ON  
Set these switches to 1010 to select  
9600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
@ CTS selection (selector switch)  
Set this always to 0V (ON).  
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)  
Set this switch to ON.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: C500-LK203  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-422A.  
5V supply  
ON  
OFF  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SW1  
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code  
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)  
I/O port  
RS-422A  
RS-232C  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).  
Synchronization  
Internal  
ON  
External  
@ Synchronization (selector switch)  
Set this to Internal.  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminator  
OFF  
ON  
SW2  
@ Communications speed  
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
CTS  
0V  
Set these switches to 0010 to select  
19,200 bps.  
External  
ON  
Set these switches to 1010 to select  
9,600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
@ CTS selection (selector switch)  
Set this always to 0V (ON).  
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)  
Set this switch to ON.  
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1  
Setting the Rear Switches  
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code  
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)  
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).  
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is  
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.  
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)  
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.  
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.  
(0: OFF 1: ON)  
SW1  
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)  
SW2  
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).  
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)  
Set these switches to ON (1).  
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)  
SW3  
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)  
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1).  
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to OFF (0).  
(Set terminator ON.)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit  
CVM1/CV series rack-mounting type: CV500-LK201  
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (commu-  
nication ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A type host link method, set commu-  
nication port 2 to RS-422A.  
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the  
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method,  
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-422A (the  
lower position).  
CPU Bus Unit Settings  
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following commu-  
nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.  
Item  
Communications speed  
Transfer code  
Parity  
Setting at Host  
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.  
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits  
Even  
(*1)  
(*2)  
1-to-1/1-to-N  
1-to-N  
Instruction level  
Level 1, 2, 3  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting  
the Host Link Method (page 158).  
*1 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually  
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.  
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYS-  
MAC support software).  
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series  
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Setting the Front Switches  
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)  
Set these switches to 0.  
Communications port 1  
(RS-232C)  
Communications port 2  
(RS-232C/RS-422A)  
I/O port selector switch  
RS-232C  
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-422A.  
RS-422A  
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)  
Set this switch to OFF.  
Communication is executed in accordance with the  
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The  
initial values for the system settings are as follows.  
- Communications speed: 9,600 bps  
- Parity: Even  
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed  
- Communication method: Full duplex  
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits  
- Data length: 7 bits  
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)  
Set this to ON.  
Connecting to a CPU Unit  
CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs  
CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
PC Setup  
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication  
conditions for the PC Setup.  
Item  
Communications speed  
Stop bit  
Setting at Host  
(*1)  
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.  
2 stop bits  
Even  
Parity  
Data length  
Unit #  
ASCII 7 bits  
00  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting  
the Host Link Method (page 158).  
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support  
software), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.  
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/  
CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Setting the Front Switches  
@ Host link communication method  
selection (selector switch)  
Set this to RS-422A.  
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)  
Set SW3 to OFF.  
(for host link communication)  
@ Host link default value settings  
(DIP SW4)  
To effect the existing DIP switch  
settings, set SW4 to ON.  
I/O port selector switch  
RS-232C  
To effect the values set in the PC Setup,  
set SW4 to OFF.  
RS-422A  
Note  
For CPUs manufactured before or  
during June 1995 (lot No.  
j
j
6
5
)
,
t
h
e
existing DIP switch settings differ from  
the PC Setup default values as follows.  
- Existing DIP switch settings:  
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit  
data length  
- PC Setup default values:  
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7  
bit data length  
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995  
onward (lot No.  
j
j
7
5
)
,
t
h
e
s
t
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d
values in the DIP switch settings also  
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.  
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)  
Set this switch to ON.  
(Set terminator ON.)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1  
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in  
the following table.  
PC model  
Connection method  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications  
Board.  
CQM1H  
Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Commu-  
nications Board.  
CPM1  
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11  
RS-422A Adapter.  
CPM2A, SRM1  
CPM2C  
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11  
RS-422A Adapter.  
Connect to the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or  
CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11  
RS-422A Adapter.  
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port  
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.)  
Reference: S There are no Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in which  
port B is the RS-422A port.  
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is  
the RS-422A port.  
PC Setup Area Settings  
When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
CQM1H CPUs or SRM1, set the following communication conditions for the PC  
Setup area.  
Item  
Setting at Host  
I/O port  
RS-422A  
Communication mode  
Communications speed  
Stop bit  
Host link mode  
(*1)  
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.  
2 stop bits  
Even  
Parity  
Data length  
ASCII 7 bits  
00  
Unit #  
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the  
Comm. Speed at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link  
Method (page 158).  
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-  
Programmer).  
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for  
the PC which is used.  
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the  
unit to which the connection is made are shown below.  
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6555 0001  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6556 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6558 0000  
Unit # 00  
When using a CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6650 0001  
DM6651 0303  
0304  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6653 0000  
When using a CQM1H  
Unit # 00  
Word # Writing Value  
Settings  
DM6550 0001  
Host link mode, no CTS control  
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM  
DM6551 0303  
0304  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 9600 bps  
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,  
communications speed: 19200 bps  
DM6553 0000  
Unit # 00  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Connecting to a CPM2C  
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on  
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and  
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using  
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,  
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-  
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.  
Peripheral port  
CPM2C-CN111  
CPM2C  
CPM2C  
CS1W-CN114  
Peripheral port  
RS-232C port  
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)  
Setting Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board  
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.  
Switch 1:  
Switch 2 :  
Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)  
Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)  
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board  
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.  
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)  
Terminator (TERM):  
Set to ON for termination ON.  
Serial Communications Board  
(Inner Board slot 1)  
Terminator Switch (TERM)  
Set to ON (right side).  
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)  
Set to 4 (right side).  
Setting the Switches on an RS-422A Adapter  
CPM1-  
CIF11  
CPM1  
Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position).  
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board  
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series  
CPU Type :  
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU  
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or  
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of  
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the  
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing  
the STUP command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings  
are shown.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Allocation DM  
area (CH)  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Port 2  
DM32010  
8000  
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, data length 7 bits,  
even parity,  
DM32011  
0000  
0007  
0000  
0000  
Communication speed  
Communication speed  
Transmit delay time  
No CTS control  
9600 bps.  
19200 bps.  
DM32012  
DM32016  
0 ms.  
Unit No.0 for host link  
Using the NT Link (1:1) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A type NT link (1:1)  
function built in.  
The C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT  
link (1:1) method by installing a Communications Board.  
The CQM1H CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) meth-  
od by installing a Serial Communications Board.  
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the  
connections.  
The host units that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C by  
the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.  
CPUs with Built-in RS-422A type NT  
PC Series  
Model Name  
C200HE (-Z)E  
Link (1:1) Function  
(*1)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
(*1)  
(*1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
C200HG (-Z)E  
C200HX (-Z)E  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
C series  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
(*1)  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
(*1)  
CQM1H-CPU51/61  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CQM1H  
CV500  
CV series  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000  
CV2000  
(*2)  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
CVM1  
series  
CVM1  
(*2)  
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:  
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.  
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.  
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.  
The NT link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT link (1:1)  
method, connect by RS-422A.  
NT link connection using RS-422A/485 is not possible with CPM1.  
Settings at the Host  
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs  
CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
PC Setup  
When connecting to the CVM1/CV series CPU by the NT link (1:1) method, no  
particular settings are required at the PC Setup.  
Setting the Front Switches  
@ Host link communication method selection  
(selector switch)  
Set this to RS-422A.  
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)  
I/O port selector switch  
Set this switch to ON.  
RS-232C  
(for communication by NT link)  
RS-422A  
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)  
Set this switch to ON.  
(Set terminator ON.)  
Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CQM1H  
PC Setup Area Settings  
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming  
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model.  
Host Model  
Word # Writing Value  
Setting  
*1  
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
DM6555  
DM6550  
4000  
4000  
Use NT link (1:1)  
*2  
Port 2 of CQM1H  
*1 RS-422A port of the communication board  
*1 RS-422A port of the Serial Communications Board  
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for  
the PC you are using.  
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board  
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.  
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)  
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)  
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board  
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.  
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Terminator (TERM):  
Set to ON for termination ON.  
Serial Communications Board  
(Inner Board slot 1)  
Terminator Switch (TERM)  
Set to ON (right side).  
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)  
Set to 4 (right side).  
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 type NT link  
(1:N) method are the CS1G/H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and CQM1H models only.  
A Serial Communications Board or a communications board must be installed to  
make the connection.  
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communica-  
tions board before making the connections.  
The host units that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT31/NT31C by  
the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) function via a convertor are indicated in the table  
below.  
CPUs with Built-in  
RS-422A type  
NT Link (1:N) Function  
CPU that becomes  
connectable by installing a  
communication board  
PC  
Series  
Model Name  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)  
(*1)  
CS1G  
CS1H  
CS1  
series  
---  
---  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/  
(*1)  
67-E(V1)  
(*2)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE  
(-Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
---  
C200HG (-Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C series  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX  
(-Z)E  
---  
---  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
(*2)  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
(*3)  
CQM1H-CPU51/61  
CQM1H  
*1 The serial CS1W-SCB41-E communication board is required.  
*1 A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 communication board is required.  
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.  
Settings at the Host  
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E and CQM1H  
PC Setup Area Settings  
Write the communication conditions directly into the PC Setup area (data  
memory) using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).  
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Connection to  
Word # Writing Value  
Setting  
Port A of a C200HX/  
HG/HE(-Z)E  
Use NT link (1:N)  
DM6555  
DM6550  
5
j
0
0
*1  
j
=
h
i
g
h
e
s
t
u
n
i
t
n
u
m
b
e
r
o
f
t
h
e
*3  
connected PTs (1 to 7)  
*2  
Port 2 of a CQM1H  
5j 00  
*1 The Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port  
*1 The Serial Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port  
*1 When using C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.  
For details on setting the PC Setup area settings, refer to the PC’s operation  
manual.  
Reference: S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in  
which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.  
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is  
the RS-422A/485 port.  
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board  
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.  
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A), or  
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)  
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)  
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board  
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.  
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)  
or  
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)  
Terminator (TERM):  
Set to ON for termination ON.  
Serial Communications Board  
(Inner Board slot 1)  
Terminator Switch (TERM)  
Set to ON (right side)  
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)  
When using RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.  
When using RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.  
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Board  
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series  
CPU type :  
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Setting the Front Switches  
RDY  
COMM1  
COMM2  
Port 1  
RS-232C  
PORT1  
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)  
Set to ON (Terminal resistance is present.) (right side)  
OFF  
2
ON TERM  
4
WIRE  
Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)  
For RS-422A : 4 (4 wire type) (right side)  
For RS-485 : 2 (2 wire type) (left side)  
Port 2  
PORT2  
(RS422/  
RS485)  
RS-422A/485  
SCB41  
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU  
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or  
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of  
the CPU. After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power  
ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the  
STUP command.  
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are  
shown.  
Allocation DM  
area (CH)  
Writing Value  
Settings  
Port 2  
DM32010  
8200  
0000 to 0009  
000  
NT link (1:N) mode  
Communications baud rate (standard)  
= The largest model number of the con-  
nected PT (0 – 7)  
(*1)  
DM32011  
DM32016  
j
j
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.  
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between  
0000 and 0009 Hex.  
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2 in  
the NT link (1:N), set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010, 0000 Hex for DM32011,  
and 0006 Hex for D32016.  
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method  
Compatible Host Units  
Only OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link  
through RS-422A/RS-485. The high-speed 1:N NT Link must be established  
through a CS1W-SCB41-E Serial Communications Board. (If a Serial Commu-  
nications Board is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be  
connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)  
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Board/Unit before trying to  
establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an  
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link through RS-422A/RS-485.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
PCs supporting direct connection to PCs supporting connection through a  
the CPU Unit  
Serial Communication Board  
(*1)  
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)  
---  
(*1)  
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)  
*1 A CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.  
Settings at the Host  
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board  
Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS-422A/485 port for CS1-se-  
ries CPU Units:  
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)  
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-  
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and  
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.  
Setting the Front Switches  
RDY  
COMM1  
COMM2  
Port 1  
RS-232C  
PORT1  
Terminator Switch (TERM)  
Set to ON (right side)  
OFF  
2
ON TERM  
4
WIRE  
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)  
RS-422A:Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.  
RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.  
PORT2  
(RS422/  
RS485)  
Port 2  
RS-422A/485  
SCB41  
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings  
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-  
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the  
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,  
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP  
command.  
In the following table, the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and  
settings are shown.  
Allocation DM area  
Writing  
Settings  
Value  
8200  
000A  
Port 2  
DM32010  
NT link (1:N) mode  
DM32011  
DM32016  
Communications baud rate (high-speed)  
j = The largest model number of the  
connected PT (0 – 7)  
000j  
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2,  
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32010, 000A Hex to DM32011, and 0006 Hex to  
DM32016.  
When using the Memory  
Link Method  
With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal com-  
puter and an FA computer with RS-422A.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to  
create a program for the memory link at the host side.  
The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the  
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.),  
its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in  
the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C  
by the memory switch. (page 165).  
Item  
Input/Output board  
Communication speed  
Data bits length  
Stop bits length  
Parity  
Setting at Host  
RS-422A  
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.  
7 bits, 8 bits  
1 bit, 2 bits  
None, even, odd  
Flow control  
None, XON/XOFF  
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units  
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT31/NT31C and a  
host are connected is described here.  
Host link/CPU/  
Communication unit  
NT31/NT31C  
SYSMAC  
CS1 series PLC,  
C series PLC,  
CVM1/CV series  
PLC, SRM1  
9-pin connector or  
Serial port B  
25-pin  
25-pin connector  
(RS-422A, 25-pin type)  
connector  
RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500m)  
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host (RS-422A)  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-422A  
Wiring When Connecting a C-series Host Link Unit or CPM1 (Host Link)  
Applicable units:  
C200H-LK202-V1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
C500-LK203  
3G2A6-LK202-EV1  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Connector  
SG  
7
FG  
hood  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RDB  
RS-422A  
connector  
TRM  
9
9
5
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
SDB  
RDA  
FG  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
SDA  
(9-pin type)  
Shielding wire  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
Wiring When Connecting CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1  
Applicable units:  
CPM1-10CDR-  
j
CPM1-20CDR-  
j
CPM1A-10CDj-  
CPM1A-30CDj-  
j
j
CPM1A-20CDj-  
CPM1A-40CDj-  
j
j
CPM2A-30CD  
CPM2A-60CD  
j
j
j-  
j-  
j
j
CPM2A-40CD  
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-20  
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
SRM1-C02-V2  
Connect to the PC through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.  
NT31/NT31C side  
1
14  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC side  
CS  
5
6
Abbreviation  
FG  
SG  
SG  
7
FG  
8
SG  
RS-422A  
SDB  
SDA  
RDB  
RDA  
TRM  
9
SDB (+)  
SDA ()  
RDB (+)  
RDA ()  
terminal  
block  
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
(9-pin type)  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
Shielding wire  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications  
Board, C series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, CQM1H Seri-  
al Communications Board, or CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit  
Applicable units:  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU61  
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
interface  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Connector  
SG  
7
FG  
hood  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA  
SDB  
RS-422A  
interface  
TRM  
9
9
5
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
RDA  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
RDB  
13  
25  
(9-pin type)  
Shielding wire  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of  
the NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
Wiring When Connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU  
Applicable units:  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU11-EV  
CVM1-CPU01-EV  
j
j
j
CVM1-CPU21-EV  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj can-  
not be connected by any connection method.  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC (CPU) side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Connector  
SG  
7
FG  
hood  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA  
SDB  
RS-422A  
connector  
TRM  
9
9
5
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
RS  
CS  
RDA  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
RDB  
13  
25  
(9-pin type)  
Shielding wire  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection  
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.  
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
Host side  
CS  
5
6
Abbreviation  
Connector  
hood  
SG  
7
8
SDA  
SDB  
RS  
RS-422A  
connector  
TRM  
9
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
CS  
ROA  
ROB  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
Shielding wire  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units  
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT31/NT31C and a host  
are connected is described here.  
NT31/NT31C  
CPU  
CS1G/H  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CQM1H  
Serial port B  
(RS-485, 25-pin type)  
9-pin connector  
25-pin connector  
RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)  
Reference: When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT link (1:N) method (standard or  
high-speed) can be used.  
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-485  
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications  
Board and C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board, or  
CQM1H Serial Communications Board  
Applicable units:  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU51  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU61  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC (CPU) side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
SG  
7
FG  
hood  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA ()  
RS-422A  
connector  
TRM  
9
SDB (+)  
9
5
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
RDB (+)  
13  
25  
(9-pin type)  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports  
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs  
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.  
CPU  
NT31/NT31C  
CS1G/H  
Serial port B  
(RS-422A, 25-pin  
type)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CQM1H  
9-pin connector  
25-pin connector  
Relay terminal block  
Max. 2 m  
RS-422A cables  
(max. total length 500 m)  
24V  
DC  
PRINTER PORT  
B
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Reference: S Communication using the RS-422A type standard NT link (1:N) method is  
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed  
in a CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/  
HG/HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed  
in a CQM1H.  
S Communication using the RS-422A type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is  
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed  
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.  
Connecting between  
NT31/NT31C Units  
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal  
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-422A  
:
1
1
14  
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
Connector  
FG  
FG  
hood  
hood  
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
SD  
SD  
RD  
RD  
3
3
RS  
4
4
RS  
CS  
CS  
5
5
6
6
SG  
SG  
7
7
8
8
:
TRM  
TRM  
9
9
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
RDB (+)  
RDB (+)  
RDB (+)  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
(25-pin type)  
(25-pin type)  
*2  
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the  
end of the RS-422A cable (marked : in the figure above) only.  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, connect the functional ground of only one of  
the NT31/NT31C units to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and a Host  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-422A  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication  
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H  
Serial Communications Board  
Applicable units:  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU61  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
1
2
SD  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
interface  
RD  
3
RS  
4
PC side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
FG  
SG  
7
hood  
8
SDA ()  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-422A  
interface  
TRM  
9
SDB (+)  
9
5
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SDB (+)  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
RDB (+)  
13  
25  
(9-pin type)  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
(25-pin type)  
Next PT  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports  
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs  
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.  
CPU  
NT31/NT31C  
CS1G/H  
Serial port B  
(RS-485, 25-pin type)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
CQM1H  
9-pin connector  
25-pin connector  
Relay terminal block  
Max. 2 m  
RS-485 cables  
(max. total length 500 m)  
24V  
DC  
PRINTER PORT  
B
Reference: S Communication using the RS-485 type standard NT link (1:N) method is pos-  
sible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a  
CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/HG/  
HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a  
CQM1H.  
S Communication using the RS-485 type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is  
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed  
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Connecting between NT31/NT31C Units  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-485  
:
NT31/NT31C side  
NT31/NT31C side  
1
1
Abbreviation Pin number  
Pin number Abbreviation  
14  
14  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
Connector  
hood  
FG  
FG  
hood  
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
SD  
SD  
RD  
RD  
3
3
RS  
4
4
RS  
CS  
CS  
5
5
6
6
SG  
SG  
7
7
8
8
:
TRM  
TRM  
9
9
RDB (+)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
13  
25  
13  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
23  
24  
25  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
(25-pin type)  
(25-pin type)  
Next PT  
*2  
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the  
end of the RS-485 cable (marked : in the figure above) only.  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.  
Connecting an  
NT31/NT31C and a Host  
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal  
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.  
NT31/NT31C  
Host  
RS-485  
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication  
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H  
Serial Communications Board  
Applicable units:  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU61  
1
6
1
14  
NT31/NT31C side  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
1
2
RS-232C/  
422A/485  
connector  
SD  
RD  
3
4
RS  
PC (CPU) side  
CS  
5
6
Pin number Abbreviation  
Shielding wire  
Connector  
FG  
7
SG  
hood  
8
SDA ()  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-422A  
connector  
9
TRM  
SDB (+)  
9
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
RDA ()  
SDA ()  
RDA ()  
RDB (+)  
13  
25  
(9-pin type)  
23  
24  
25  
RSB (+)  
RSA ()  
(25-pin type)  
Next PT  
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the  
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-485A cable.  
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals  
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-422A/485  
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the rec-  
ommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link  
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the  
CPU (CP) side. Some units come supplied with one connector and connector  
hood.  
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.  
Name  
Model  
Maker  
Remarks  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
XM2A-2501  
Made by OMRON  
C500-LK203  
Connector  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
DB-25P F-N  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Name  
Model  
Maker  
Remarks  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
XM2S-2511  
Made by OMRON  
C500-LK203  
Connector  
hood  
Delivered with the following  
units:  
25-pin type  
DB-C2-J9  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
Made by JAE  
Tachii Electric  
Wire Co., Ltd.  
Cable  
TKVVBS4P-03  
1.25-N3A  
(fork type)  
Japan Solderless  
Terminal MFG  
Recommended cable size:  
AWG22 to 18  
(0.3 to 0.75 mm )  
Crimp  
terminals  
Y1.25-3.5L  
(fork type)  
2
Molex Inc.  
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specifica-  
tion. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with  
a tightening torque of 0.5 N@m.  
Use the same specification of the terminal screws which is used in the relay ter-  
minal block.  
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.  
Examples of applicable terminals  
Round type  
Fork type  
6.2 mm or less  
6.2 mm or less  
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications  
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting  
terminal (TRM).  
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at  
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.  
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal  
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting termi-  
nals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 . When  
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between  
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.  
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at  
the end of the cable.  
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting  
is ineffective.  
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s con-  
nector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the  
Cable, page 267.  
Abbreviation Pin number  
Connector  
FG  
hood  
-
Terminal resistor setting  
-
-
9
TRM  
10  
11  
12  
RDB (+)  
SDB (+)  
-
-
-
25  
-
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port  
Section 5-2  
Pin Nos. 9 and 10  
Function  
Terminal resistance is applied.  
Shorted  
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an  
RS-422A/485 cable.  
Terminal resistance is not applied.  
Open  
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C  
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.  
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the  
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PC, etc.) is OFF.  
Reference: S The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.  
+
10 (RDB)  
16 (RDA)  
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between  
+ (RDB) and (RDA).  
Terminal resistor (120 )  
9 (TRM)  
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit, refer to setting  
methods for each type of the communication.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 6  
System Menu Operation  
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Functions that are conve-  
nient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here.  
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2-1 Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-2 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . . .  
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
133  
134  
134  
135  
135  
137  
138  
140  
140  
142  
144  
145  
147  
149  
150  
151  
151  
153  
154  
155  
157  
157  
160  
162  
163  
165  
167  
168  
168  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
174  
175  
177  
179  
181  
183  
185  
186  
188  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-1 I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-7 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-12-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-12-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-12-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-13 Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-13-1 Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-13-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-13-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-14-1 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
191  
191  
195  
197  
198  
200  
202  
205  
215  
221  
221  
223  
224  
227  
228  
228  
229  
230  
230  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Menu Operation Flow  
Section 6-1  
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow  
Follow the procedure below when using the NT31/NT31C for the first time or  
changing the system program.  
Create the Screen Data  
Create the data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C by using the Support Tool.  
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1  
for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).  
Start Up the NT31/NT31C  
(Display the System  
Menu) (page 134)  
Turn ON the power to the NT31/NT31C.  
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this  
case, press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the Sys-  
tem Menu.  
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform  
the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.  
Initialize the Memory  
(page 140)  
If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT31/NT31C by operation from the  
System Menu.  
Transmit the Screen Data  
(page 155)  
Connect the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C and transmit the screen data from  
the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C.  
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 Connecting to the Sup-  
port Tool (page 35).  
Set the Memory Switches  
(pages 157, 168, 188)  
Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT31/NT31C — for exam-  
ple the conditions for communication with the host — using the memory  
switches.  
Start Operation (page  
168)  
Connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.  
System Maintenance  
(page 191)  
If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring to  
this guide.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the NT31/NT31C  
Section 6-2  
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C  
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the  
power to the NT31/NT31C to start it up.  
This section describes the operation of the NT31/NT31C when it is started up.  
6-2-1 Operation at Startup  
The NT31/NT31C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or when  
it is reset.  
Initial Processing  
Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the NT31/NT31C  
and a system program check — and the internal processing required for startup,  
are performed.  
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.  
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be re-  
installed. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 Operations in the  
System Installer Mode (page 150).  
Memory Unit Check and  
Processing  
Check if a memory unit is installed. If a memory unit is installed, processing  
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance  
with its DIP switch settings (pages 39 and 47).  
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing the  
OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately  
before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu from the  
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneous-  
ly. If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of the system install-  
er mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper system program.  
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.  
Start of Communication  
with the Host  
Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communication  
method set in the system memory of the NT31/NT31C. During the interval until  
communication is established, the system initialization screen (screen No.  
9000) is displayed.  
For details, refer to 6-8 Starting Operation (page 168).  
If the system initialization screen remains on, display the System Menu by  
pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check  
the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host.  
Operation Start  
The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the  
screen data in the NT31/NT31C.  
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate  
operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System  
Menu, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 138).  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Modes and the System Menu  
Section 6-3  
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu  
The NT31/NT31C operates in four modes: the RUN, Transmit, Maintenance,  
and Expansion modes. These modes are selected from the System Menu.  
In addition, the NT31/NT31C also features the System Installer mode which is  
used specifically for installing the system program.  
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the  
NT31/NT31C power is switched ON.  
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes  
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and  
the System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.  
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System  
Menu (page 138).  
[RUN Mode]  
[Transmit Mode]  
This is the mode in which  
the NT31/NT31C operates.  
In this mode, screen  
data and other data are  
transmitted between the  
Support Tool and the  
NT31/NT31C.  
In this mode the  
NT31/NT31C can be  
controlled from the host,  
and various display and  
I/O operations are  
possible.  
[Maintenance Mode]  
To change system  
settings or screen  
data contents  
When system  
In this mode,  
NT31/NT31C  
maintenance operations,  
such as initialization of  
the memory, checking  
settings, and the I/O  
check, are executed.  
settings and screen  
data registration have  
been completed  
To change system  
settings or screen  
data contents.  
SYSTEM MENU  
Quit  
Transmit Mode  
Maintenance Mode  
Expansion Mode  
Power ON  
[Expansion Mode]  
In this mode, the  
If there is no system  
program, or if the  
settings for data  
Programming Console  
function is used, or check  
the version of system  
program.  
control are changed...  
[System Installer Mode]  
In this mode, the system program of the  
NT31/NT31C is installed, display of the  
System Menu is enabled or disabled, and  
screen data changes are enabled and  
disabled, among other operations.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Modes and the System Menu  
Section 6-3  
Items in the System  
Menu  
The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.  
Menu Item  
Quit  
Function  
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode  
screen.  
Transmit Mode  
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for  
screen data between the Support Tool and the NT31/NT31C.  
For details on transmission of screen data, refer to 6-6 Trans-  
mitting the Screen Data (page 155).  
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system mainte-  
nance of the NT31/NT31C, and various NT31/NT31C settings.  
Expansion Mode  
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the  
expansion functions supported by the NT31/NT31C. The fol-  
lowing expansion functions are supported:  
Version Display  
Displays the version of system program, the date it was  
created, and the PT model. For details, refer to 6-14 Version  
Display.  
Programming Console Function  
Allows the NT31/NT31C to be used as a Programming Console  
for a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), or SRM1.  
For details, refer to 6-12 Programming Console Function.  
Device Monitor Function  
Allows the NT31/NT31C to change the PC’s operating mode  
and display/change the contents of words in a CS1G/CS1H,  
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/  
HE(-Z), or SRM1. For details, refer to 6-13 Device Monitor  
Function in this manual or 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the  
Reference Manual.  
Functions of the System  
Installer Mode  
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.  
Setting the display language  
Clearing and installing system programs  
Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.  
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory  
Clearing screen data  
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 Operations in the System Installer  
Mode (page 150).  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Modes and the System Menu  
Section 6-3  
6-3-2 Menu Tree  
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT31/NT31C to be  
executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu tree,  
starting from the System Menu, is shown below.  
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the Sys-  
tem Menu (page 138).  
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the  
NT31/NT31C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the  
NT31/NT31C on shipment is shown below.  
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE  
Exit System Installer  
Download System Program (page 151)  
Change System Settings (page 153)  
Erase Screen Data (page 154)  
SYSTEM MENU  
MEMORY  
MEMORY INIT. MENU  
SWITCH MENU  
Quit  
Transmit Mode (page 155)  
Maintenance Mode  
Expansion Mode  
Start-up Wait Time (page 169)  
Key Press Sound (page 170)  
Buzzer Sound (page 171)  
Quit  
Screen Data (page 140)  
Display History (page 142)  
Alarm History (page 144)  
Recipe Table (page 145)  
Memory Table (page 147)  
Memory Switch (page 149)  
Printer Controller (page 172)  
Print Method (page 174)  
MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU  
Screen Saver Movement (page 175)  
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 177)  
Hist. Disp. Method (page 179)  
Resume Function (page 181)  
Comm. Auto-return (page 183)  
Time-out Interval (page 185)  
Retry Counts (page 186)  
Quit  
Memory Init.  
Memory Switch  
I/O Settings  
Calendar Check (page 195)  
PT Settings (page 197)  
Display History  
Alarm History  
Comm. A Method (page 157)  
Comm. B Select (page 167)  
Comm. B Method (page 157)  
Screen Data Disp. (page 202)  
I/O Check  
I/O SETTINGS MENU  
I/O CHECK MENU  
Quit  
Contrast Adjust (page 191)  
Brightness Adjust (page 193)  
Quit  
I/F Check  
Device Check  
DISPLAY HISTORY MENU  
EXPANSION  
MODE MENU  
Quit  
I/F CHECK MENU  
Sort by Occurrence (page 198)  
Sort by Frequency (page 198)  
Quit  
Quit  
Programming Console Function (page 221)  
Version Display (page 230)  
Device Monitor Function (page 227)  
Tool Comm. (page 215)  
Comm. Port A (page 217)  
Comm. Port B (page 217)  
Printer (page 220)  
ALARM HISTORY MENU  
Quit  
Sort by Occurrence (page 200)  
Sort by Frequency (page 200)  
DEVICE CHECK MENU  
Quit  
Buzzer Check (page 205)  
LED Check (page 206)  
LCD Check (page 208)  
Backlight Check (page 209)  
Screen Memory (page 209)  
Touch Switch (page 212)  
Battery (page 214)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Modes and the System Menu  
Section 6-3  
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu  
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System  
Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu items.  
Calling the System Menu  
The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.  
Touching the corners of the touch panel  
Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu  
Reference: S If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System  
Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not apply if an  
error has occurred).  
S At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the  
NT31/NT31C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.  
Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel  
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are  
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.  
RUN mode  
POWER  
[SYSTEM MENU]  
RUN  
Quit  
Press any two of the four  
corners at the same time.  
Transmit Mode  
Maintenance Mode  
Expansion Mode  
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at  
corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the  
touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. In particu-  
lar, when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of screen  
switch over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To suc-  
cessfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch switch is dis-  
played, and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch  
switch.  
Reference: With the NT31/NT31C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen has  
touch switches registered at all four corners.  
Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu  
There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu.  
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a screen  
when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch.  
Calling the System  
Installer Mode  
If the NT31/NT31C has no system program installed, or if the system program is  
destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established when the  
power is switched ON.  
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or  
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Modes and the System Menu  
Section 6-3  
NT31/NT31C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch  
panel (size: 7.2 mm   7.2 mm).  
Switch the power to the NT31/NT31C ON while pressing this touch switch.  
POWER  
RUN  
Selecting Menu Items  
The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT31/NT31C screen  
as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them.  
Example: Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing  
Maintenance Mode in the System Menu.  
Ver 3.10  
Press Maintenance Mode.  
Switching from the  
System Menu to the RUN  
Mode  
Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus.  
Reference: Unlike previous PT models, the NT31/NT31C does not return to the RUN mode  
automatically if no operations are performed.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
6-4 Memory Initialization  
The NT31/NT31C has the following initialization functions. Use them as neces-  
sary.  
Clearing screen data  
Initializing memory tables  
Initializing memory switches  
Initializing display history record data  
Initializing alarm history record data  
Initializing recipe tables  
Page 140  
Page 147  
Page 149  
Page 142  
Page 144  
Page 145  
Reference: If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting  
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.  
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data  
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C  
cannot be started up correctly.  
This operation clears (initializes) only the screen data and contents of the math-  
ematical tables. The memory switch settings and display history/alarm history  
record data are retained.  
Reference: S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the  
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are  
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.  
S
T
h
e
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
a
n
b
e
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
S
y
s
t
e
m
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
r
m
o
d
e
t
o
o
(
p
a
g
e
1
5
1
)
.
S The following types of data can be initialized individually.  
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 144)  
Memory switch settings (page 147)  
Display history record data (page 142)  
Alarm history record data (page 144)  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Screen Data.  
Select Yes.  
The screen data is cleared. During clear-  
ance, the message Erasing Now... is dis-  
played.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without clearing the screen data.  
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the  
MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the  
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from  
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the  
RUN mode will not be established.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data  
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the  
screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen is dis-  
played. These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute  
has been set.  
The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence (order of display  
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each  
screen has been displayed).  
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record  
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if  
Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting of System in PT Configuration  
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum  
number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be periodically  
initialized. If Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of  
records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.  
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by  
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT  
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the  
System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Display History.  
Select Yes.  
The display history record data is initialized.  
During initialization, the message Initializing  
is displayed.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without initializing the display history record data.  
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message Finished  
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data  
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that  
have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records the time  
when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes ON), and the number of times that each bit  
comes ON.  
The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence (order of error  
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each  
error has occurred).  
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history re-  
cord data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if  
Screen (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings –  
System Settings has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the  
maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be  
periodically initialized. If Screen (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maxi-  
mum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest  
data is recorded.  
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by  
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT  
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the  
System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Alarm History.  
Select Yes.  
The alarm history record data is initialized.  
During initialization, the message Initializing  
is displayed.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without initializing the alarm history record data.  
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message Finished  
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables  
You can initialize the recipe tables (i.e., all the recipe data) edited in the  
NT31/NT31C. Here, “initializing” the recipe tables means to restore the battery  
backup memory (“recipe data memory”) to the values in flash memory at that  
time. If, after downloading from the Support Tool, you do not upload the data  
even once, initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool.  
The values will not be cleared.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Recipe Table.  
Select Yes.  
The recipe tables are initialized. During ini-  
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-  
played.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without initializing the recipe tables.  
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed  
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables  
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string  
memory tables in the NT31/NT31C.  
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the  
Support Tool (they are not cleared).  
When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values  
regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 181).  
If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the initial values set with  
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initial-  
ized.  
Reference: S If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the memory tables can  
be initialized just by switching the NT31/NT31C power off and back on again,  
or by resetting the NT31/NT31C (page 181).  
S The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and there-  
fore cannot be initialized.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Memory Table.  
Select Yes.  
The memory tables are initialized. During ini-  
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-  
played.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without initializing the memory tables.  
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed  
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Initialization  
Section 6-4  
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches  
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT31/NT31C to their status  
on shipment.  
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Init..  
Select Memory Switch.  
Select Yes.  
The memory tables are initialized. During ini-  
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-  
played.  
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen  
without initializing the memory switches.  
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message Finished is dis-  
played and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations in the System Installer Mode  
Section 6-5  
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.  
Memory Switch  
Start-up Wait Time  
Status  
00  
Key Press Sound  
Buzzer Sound  
ON  
OFF  
Printer Controller  
Print Method  
ESC/P  
Tone (NT31C only)  
Screen Saver Movement  
Screen Saver Start up Time  
Hist. Disp. Method  
Resume Function  
Comm. Auto-return  
Time-out Interval  
Retry Counts  
Display erased  
010  
From New Data  
OFF  
OFF  
01  
005  
*
Comm. A Method  
Comm. B Select  
Comm. B Method  
Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)  
RS-232C  
None  
* The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:  
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.  
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode  
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:  
Setting the display language (see below)  
Clearing/installing the system program (page 151)  
Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings)  
(page 153)  
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system  
settings) (page 153)  
Clearing screen data (page 154)  
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to Calling the System In-  
staller Mode (page 138).  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations in the System Installer Mode  
Section 6-5  
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode  
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the dis-  
play language is to be English or Japanese.  
Select English or Japanese.  
From here on, this manual assumes that  
English has been selected here.  
The System Installer mode menu is dis-  
played.  
If there is no system program or the system  
program has been corrupted, the message  
System Program not exist or incorrect. is  
displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program  
Use this function when the system program of the NT31/NT31C has been cor-  
rupted, or when installing a new system program.  
Reference: S In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be installed  
at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool  
(NT-ZJCAT1-EV4). When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer,  
install the system installer also. For details on the method for installing the sys-  
tem installer at the Support Tool side, and the operating procedure, refer to the  
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).  
S When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible to use  
the NT31/NT31C at all. Check that the system installer is installed at the Sup-  
port Tool side before deleting the program. However, note that the registered  
screen data and memory switch settings are retained.  
S It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit auto-  
matically by installing the memory unit at startup. (Refer to 3-5 Using a Memory  
Unit (-Vj Versions).)  
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Installer mode menu shown below.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations in the System Installer Mode  
Section 6-5  
Clearing the System Program  
Select Download System Program.  
Select Yes.  
The system program is cleared. During  
clearance, the message Erasing ... is dis-  
played.  
If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer  
mode menu without clearing the system program.  
If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.  
On completion of system program clearance, the NT31/NT31C enters the  
standby status for downloading of the system program.  
Downloading the System  
Program  
On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for sys-  
tem program downloading is automatically established.  
When the NT31/NT31C enters this status,  
transmit the system program from the sys-  
tem installer at the personal computer.  
During downloading, the progress of trans-  
mission is indicated on the screen.  
Select Run System.  
If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a  
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.  
When the system program is started, the NT31/NT31C starts up normally. If no  
screen data has been registered, an error message will be displayed indicating  
that screen data hasn’t been registered. Transfer the screen data and proceed.  
Reference: If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a sys-  
tem program, it is not possible to use the NT31/NT31C at all. After deleting the  
system program, be sure to download a new one.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations in the System Installer Mode  
Section 6-5  
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings  
The NT31/NT31C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the screen  
data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by operating  
errors.  
Disabling/enabling System Menu Display  
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot  
be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches. Howev-  
er, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error message  
screen.  
Disabling/enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory  
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is impossi-  
ble to use the following System Menu functions.  
Switching to the Transmit mode  
Displaying the memory switch setting screens  
Checking the screen data memory  
Displaying the initialization menu  
Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display screen  
can be displayed)  
Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System  
Installer mode menu shown below.  
Select Change System Settings.  
Select Display System Menu or Screen  
Memory Protect.  
Each time either of these items is selected,  
the setting switches from Disabled to En-  
abled or vice versa.  
Select OK.  
The settings are written to the NT31/NT31C  
while the screen is displayed.  
If Cancel is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer mode  
menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they were before  
the operation was started.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations in the System Installer Mode  
Section 6-5  
If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is  
displayed.  
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen is  
redisplayed.  
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data  
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C cannot be started  
normally, use this function to clear the screen data.  
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch set-  
tings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.  
Reference: S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the  
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are  
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.  
S
T
h
e
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
a
n
a
l
s
o
b
e
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
f
r
o
m
t
h
e
S
y
s
t
e
m
M
e
n
u
(
p
a
g
e
1
4
0
)
.
S If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message Screen  
Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode. If this hap-  
pens, initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.  
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer  
mode menu shown below.  
Select Erase Screen Data.  
Select Yes.  
The screen data is cleared. During clear-  
ance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.  
If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT.  
MENU screen without clearing the screen data.  
If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is dis-  
played.  
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the Sys-  
tem Installer mode menu screen.  
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the  
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from  
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the  
RUN mode will not be established.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmitting the Screen Data  
Section 6-6  
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data  
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the  
NT31/NT31C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.  
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support  
Tool, refer to the Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for  
Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).  
Reference: S The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the  
NT31/NT31C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit  
(-Vj Versions) or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the Vj Suffix).  
S The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud  
Rate on the Comms. Setting... window of the Support Tool.  
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System  
Setting in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is not possible.  
Screen Data Composition  
and Transmission Units  
The screen data comprises the following types of data.  
User screen data (screen units)  
System memory (memory switch) settings  
Direct connection information  
Numeral memory table data  
Character string memory table data  
Bit memory table data  
Mathematical table data  
Mark information  
Image/library data  
Recipe table data  
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in file units, or to  
transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units. (It is not  
possible to transmit mathematical table data in data units.)  
When data is transmitted in file units, all of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is  
cleared and then the new data is transmitted.  
When data is transmitted in data units, first the previous data is invalidated, then  
the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not cleared,  
free memory area in the NT31/NT31C will be insufficient when transmissions in  
data units are repeated. If this happens, write the screen data again by data  
transmission in file units.  
Transmitting Screen Data  
from the Support Tool  
To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, follow the  
procedure below.  
Operation  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Connect the NT31/NT31C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool  
has been installed and turn the power to the NT31/NT31C ON.  
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmitting the Screen Data  
Section 6-6  
3. Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below at the NT31/NT31C.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Transmit Mode.  
Select Tool Transmit.  
4. Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select  
Download (NTST PT) in the Support Tool’s Connect menu and specify the  
data to be transmitted.  
5. During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.  
6. On completion of screen data transmission, press the Quit touch switch.  
The NT31/NT31C returns to the Transmit mode.  
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, use  
the communication check functions of the NT31/NT31C to check if communica-  
tion between the NT31/NT31C is normal or not (page 215).  
Precautions to Be  
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen  
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the  
NT31/NT31C. If this happens, the NT31/NT31C may not enter the RUN mode  
when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure to  
display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be retrans-  
mitted in file units to register it correctly.  
Observed When  
Transmitting Screen Data  
The power to the NT31/NT31C is interrupted or the NT31/NT31C is reset.  
The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is  
interrupted or the computer is reset.  
The cable connecting the NT31/NT31C to the personal computer on which the  
Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.  
The Quit touch switch on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed to end screen  
data transmission.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.  
Note When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory  
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.  
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by  
Using Memory Switches  
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of com-  
munication methods can be used to communicate with a host.  
Host link  
S
M
e
m
o
r
y
l
i
n
k
m
e
t
h
o
d
NT Link (1:1)  
S Mitsubishi A-computer link method  
S Mitsubishi FX method  
NT Link (1:N)  
High-speed NT Link (1:N)  
The NT31/NT31C has the following two ports, either of which can be used for  
communications with the host, depending on the requirements.  
Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)  
Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)  
The method for setting the communication method for communications with the  
host is described here.  
For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader, refer  
to 6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 188).  
Reference: S Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code  
reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A,  
the host must be connected at serial port B. When serial port A is being used  
for communications with the host, the host must be disconnected so that the  
Support Tool can be connected.  
S There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communica-  
tions with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which 4/4 is dis-  
played). For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the  
conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9 System Settings  
(page 168).  
S When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method,  
a system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to  
the NT31/31C by the system installer (refer to page 151). For details, refer to  
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j).  
S When using PLCs manufactured by Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, or Siemens, re-  
fer to NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j).  
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions  
Items Set for  
Communication  
Conditions  
The following settings are made for the communication conditions for commu-  
nication between the NT31/NT31C and the host.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Port Communication Method/Communication Type Settings  
Setting Item  
Function  
Setting Options  
Page  
Comm. A Method  
Set the communication method used at serial  
port A. Depending on the communication meth- model.  
od, further communication condition settings  
may be necessary.  
A system program for OMRON  
Page 160  
Page 162  
Page 163  
Page 165  
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/  
NT Link (1:N) (standard or high-  
speed)/Bar-Code Reader  
Memory link  
Comm. B Select  
Comm. B Method  
Set whether serial port B is to be used for  
RS-232C or RS-422A communication.  
RS-232C/RS-422A  
Page 167  
Set the communication method used at serial  
port B. Depending on the communication meth- model.  
od, further communication condition settings  
may be necessary.  
A system program for OMRON  
Page 160  
Page 162  
Page 163  
Page 165  
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/  
NT Link (1:N) (standard or high-  
speed)  
Memory link  
Communication Condition Settings for The Host Link Method  
Setting Item  
Function  
Setting Op-  
tions  
Page  
Comm. Speed  
(for host link only)  
Sets the communications speed  
for communications with the host. 19200 bps  
9600 bps/  
Page  
160  
Communication Condition Settings for The NT link (1:1) Method  
No further communication conditions need to be set.  
Communication Conditions Settings for The NT Link (1:N) Method  
Setting Item  
Function  
Setting Op-  
tions  
Page  
Unit No.  
(for NT link (1:N)  
only)  
Set the unit number of the  
NT31/NT31C.  
0 to 7  
Page  
163  
Comm. Speed  
Sets the communications speed  
for communications with the host. high-speed  
Standard or  
Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Meth-  
od  
Setting Item  
Function  
Setting Op-  
tions  
Page  
Data bits  
Set the data bits length.  
Set the stop bits length.  
Set the parity.  
7, 8 bits  
1, 2 bits  
Page  
165  
Stop bits  
Parity  
None, even,  
odd  
Comm. Speed  
Set the communications speed  
for communications with the host. 4800, 9600,  
1200, 2400,  
19200, 38400  
bps  
Flow control  
Response  
Set the flow control and its meth- None, RS/CS,  
od.  
XON/XOFF  
Set whether the response is car- Yes, No  
ried out for normal process of  
communication command or not.  
Possible Combinations  
of Communication  
Method Settings  
The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the  
NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than these  
listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer to the  
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection  
Manual (V060-E1-j).  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Serial port A  
Serial port B  
None  
Host Link  
NT Link  
(1:1)  
NT Link  
(1:N)  
Bar-code  
reader  
Memory  
Link  
None  
f
f
f
f
f
 
 
 
f
 
 
 
f
 
 
 
f
f
f
f
f
 
 
 
Host Link  
NT Link (1:1)  
NT Link (1:N)  
(Standard or  
high-speed)  
Memory Link  
f
 
 
 
f
 
f
:
P
o
s
s
i
b
l
e
c
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
 : Impossible combination  
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.  
Reference: When using serial port B for communication with the host, and serial port A for the  
transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of serial port A  
to None.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method  
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri-  
al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Display the fourth memory switch screen by  
pressing the [] (next screen) or [] (pre-  
vious screen) touch switch.  
Press the touch switch corresponding to the  
port at which the host link method is to be set  
(Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to  
display the setting option Host Link.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the  
port at which the setting has been made.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
Press the Comm. Speed touch switch to dis-  
play the communications speed to be set.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
Press Quit.  
The communications speed is set.  
To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu-  
nications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the  
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed  
remains in effect.  
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to  
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method  
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:1) method at serial port A or  
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Display the fourth memory switch screen by  
pressing the [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) touch switch.  
Press the touch switch corresponding to the  
port at which the NT link (1:1) method is to be  
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to  
display the setting option NT Link (1:1).  
The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed)  
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:N) method at serial port A or  
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.  
The communications speed determines whether the 1:N NT Link is standard or  
high-speed.  
Standard:  
Standard 1:N NT Link  
High-speed:  
High-speed 1:N NT Link  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Display the fourth memory switch screen by  
pressing the [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) touch switch.  
Press the touch switch corresponding to the  
port at which the NT link (1:N) method (stan-  
dard or high-speed) is to be set (Comm. A  
Method or Comm. B Method) to display the  
setting option NT Link (1:N).  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the  
port at which the setting has been made.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
Press the Unit No. touch switch to display  
the unit number to be set. Press the Comm.  
Speed touch switch to display the commu-  
nications speed, standard or 115.2-kbps  
high-speed. (The Comm. Speed setting de-  
termines which method of 1:N NT Link is  
used.)  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed. In this example, se-  
rial port A is used for a standard 1:N NT Link.  
Press Quit.  
The unit number and communications  
speed are set.  
To quit the unit number/communications speed setting screen without confirm-  
ing the unit number/communications speed settings, press the Abort touch  
switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the memory switch setting screen (4/4)  
with the previous settings still in effect.  
Reference: Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are con-  
nected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs. The units num-  
bers that can be set differ according to the host model, as follows.  
S
C
2
0
0
H
E
(
-
Z
E
)
:
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)  
S
C
2
0
0
H
G
(
-
Z
E
)
,
C
2
0
0
H
X
(
-
Z
E
)
:
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)  
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers  
among PTs.  
On completion of unit number/communications speed setting a, the  
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method  
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri-  
al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below. Check  
the communication settings of the host to be used.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Display the fourth memory switch screen by  
pressing the [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) touch switch.  
Press the touch switch corresponding to the  
port at which the memory link method is to be  
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to  
display the setting option Memory Link.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the  
port at which the setting has been made.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)  
by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch.  
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)  
by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch.  
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)  
by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch.  
Display the communication speed to be set  
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)  
by pressing the Comm. Speed touch switch.  
Display the condition of the flow control to be  
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing  
Flow Control touch switch.  
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B set-  
ting, RS/CS is not displayed.  
Display presence or absence of the response  
by pressing the Response touch switch.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
In this example, serial port A is used.  
Press the Quit touch switch.  
To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu-  
nications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the  
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed  
remains in effect.  
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to  
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches  
Section 6-7  
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B  
Set the communication type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following  
the operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Display the fourth memory switch screen by  
pressing the [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) touch switch.  
Press the Comm. B Select touch switch to  
display the communication type to be set.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
Reference: f serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, RS-422A must be set as its  
communication type.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-8 Starting Operation  
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication  
conditions, connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.  
Note Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using  
them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.  
Switching to the RUN  
Mode and Starting  
Operation  
Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The  
NT31/NT31C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.  
The operation at the start is as follows.  
Display of The System Initialization Screen  
When establishing the communication with a host, the System initializing char-  
acter string is displayed on the screen. If the communication with the host cannot  
be established, the System initializing screen remains up. If this is the case,  
check the settings at the host and the PT side, the cables and wiring.  
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other  
than the System initialization screen.  
Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables  
If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON, or if the initial values of the  
memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/character-string memory  
tables are copied to the allocated words at the host.  
Display of The Startup Screen  
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen number of the  
screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.  
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data registered  
for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.  
Confirming the  
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are per-  
formed normally.  
Communications  
between the NT31/NT31C  
and the Host  
Confirm that the NT31/NT31C screens switch in accordance with the host pro-  
gram.  
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the  
host and the NT31/NT31C, and also check if the hardware settings are cor-  
rect. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C  
Port, or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character  
string input at the NT31/NT31C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the  
contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Pro-  
grammer).  
If the results of operations at the NT31/NT31C are not sent to the host cor-  
rectly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting dis-  
play elements, refer to the description of each display element in the Refer-  
ence Manual.  
6-9 System Settings  
The NT31/NT31C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during op-  
eration to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory  
switch settings relating to the operation environment.  
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the bat-  
tery in the NT31/NT31C, they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF.  
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens  
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be dis-  
played by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch switches.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
Memory Switch Settings  
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.  
Start-up Wait Time  
Key Press Sound  
Buzzer Sound  
page 169  
page 170  
page 171  
page 172  
page 174  
page 175  
page 177  
page 179  
page 181  
page 183  
page 185  
page 186  
page 157  
Printer Controller  
Print Method  
Screen Saver Movement  
Screen Saver Start up Time  
Hist. Disp. Method  
Resume Function  
Comm. Auto-return  
Time-out Interval  
Retry Counts  
Comm. A Method  
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 188.)  
Comm. B Select  
page 167  
page 157  
Comm. B Method  
For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.  
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time  
The Start-up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT31/NT31C switches to the  
RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset. Set  
this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing is displayed  
during the Start-up Wait Time.  
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 00sec.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press Start-up Wait Time to display the re-  
quired time lapse.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed, according to the fol-  
lowing sequence.  
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound  
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch  
on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed.  
ON: When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.  
OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.  
The default (factory) setting is ON.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press Key Press Sound to display ON or  
OFF.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound  
The NT31/NT31C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruc-  
tion from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether or not the  
buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.  
ON:  
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.  
OFF:  
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur.  
ERROR ON:  
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.  
The default (factory) setting is OFF.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Reference: S There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this  
memory switch setting has the highest priority.  
S For details on the buzzer, refer to 2-15-5 Buzzer Function in the Reference  
Manual.  
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press Buzzer Sound to display ON, OFF,  
or ERROR ON.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller  
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it  
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.  
Three types of printer can be connected to the NT31/NT31C: select the type  
used with this memory switch setting.  
ESC/P:  
Printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control  
specifications or printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J82 (mono-  
chrome) control specifications.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
PC-PR201H:  
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.  
PCL 5:  
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.  
Note that the NT31 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and  
does not support color printing.  
For the NT31, the Print Method is fixed as Tone.  
The default (factory) setting is ESC/P.  
Reference: S In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Print Method setting (page 174).  
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference  
Manual.  
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press Printer Controller to display the re-  
quired printer type.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only)  
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it  
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.  
When using the NT31C, the currently displayed screen image or other data can  
be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually printed out  
in color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this memory switch  
setting.  
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as Tone.  
Color: Color images are printed in color.  
Tone: Color images are printed in monochrome tones.  
The default (factory) setting is Tone.  
Reference: S In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Printer Controller setting (page 172).  
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference  
Manual.  
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press Print Method to display the required  
printing method.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement  
The NT31/NT31C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by  
turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of  
time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random  
colors (the colors only change for the NT31C).  
The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character  
strings are displayed while the screen display is off.  
If Display is selected, the character string stored in character string memory  
table No. 0 is displayed.  
If Display erase is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the back-  
light is also turned off while the screen display is off.  
The default (factory) setting is Display erased.  
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of the  
following operations.  
Touching any part of the touch panel  
Screen switching due to PT status control area operations  
Screen switching due to bit memory table operations  
Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:  
Changing the backlight mode  
Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)  
Screen display (change from OFF to ON)  
Reference: S The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up  
Time setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time  
(page 177).  
S Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting, the  
screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start  
up Time.  
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In  
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the second memory  
switch setting screen.  
Press Screen Saver Movement to display  
Display or Display erased.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time  
The NT31/NT31C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and  
prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the  
backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.  
The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the  
screen saver function operates.  
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes.  
If 000 is set, the screen saver function does not operate.  
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any of  
the following operations.  
Touching any part of the touch panel  
Screen switching due to PT status control area operations  
Screen switching due to bit memory table operations  
Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:  
Changing the backlight mode  
Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)  
Screen display (change from OFF to ON)  
Reference: S It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory  
table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display  
is off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement (page 175).  
Note however that, when this feature is used, the backlight does not go off.  
S For details on the screen saver function, refer to 2-15-4 Screen Saver Function  
in the Reference Manual.  
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In  
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the second memory switch  
setting screen.  
Set a time in the input field to the right of  
Screen Saver Start up Time.  
Each of the digits can be incremented or  
decremented by pressing the associated +  
and keys.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method  
The NT31/NT31C features the display history record function, which records the  
time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times  
they are displayed, and the alarm history record function, which continually  
monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and  
the number of times they come ON.  
The Hist. Disp. Method setting determines whether — when these record data  
are displayed in sort by occurrence — the records are displayed in a progression  
from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.  
From Old Data:  
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.  
From New Data:  
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.  
The default (factory) setting is From New Data.  
Reference: S When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the his-  
tory record contents cannot be retained.  
S For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record  
function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function and 2-15-2 Alarm  
History Record Function in the Reference Manual.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the second memory switch  
setting screen.  
Press Hist. Disp. Method to display the re-  
quired display order.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function  
The NT31/NT31C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables even  
when the power to the NT31/NT31C is OFF and write back them to the host  
when the power is turned ON.  
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial  
values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are not  
initialized and are kept the battery-backed up contents.  
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state that  
is set by the Support Tool.  
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the  
previous contents of the memory table.  
ON:  
The resume function is used.  
OFF: The resume function is not used.  
The default (factory) setting is OFF.  
Reference: S When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the  
memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume  
function.  
S For details on the resume record function, refer to 2-15-3 Resume Function in  
the Reference Manual.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the second memory switch  
setting screen.  
Press Resume Function to display the re-  
quired setting.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function  
The NT31/NT31C has a function for ignoring communication errors and auto-  
matically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.  
The Comm. Auto-return setting determines whether the automatic reset func-  
tion is effective or not.  
ON:  
When a communication error occurs, the NT31/NT31C automatically returns  
to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the System Initializing  
screen may be displayed).  
OFF:  
When a communication error occurs, an error screen is displayed and opera-  
tion stops. Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT31/NT31C to the  
RUN mode.  
The default (factory) setting is OFF.  
Reference: S If a communication error occurs when OFF is set for Comm. Auto-return, the  
NT31/NT31C makes the number of attempts at communication with the host  
specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch (page 186). If com-  
munication cannot be re-established in any of these attempts, an error screen  
is displayed.  
S For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and  
Their Remedies (page 239).  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the third memory switch  
setting screen.  
Press Comm. Auto-return to display the re-  
quired setting.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval  
The NT31/NT31C goes into the time-out error status if no response is received  
from the host within a fixed time. The Time-out Interval setting specifies the time  
lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.  
The setting range is 1 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.  
Reference: Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is deter-  
mined by the setting for the Comm. Auto-return memory switch.  
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the third memory switch  
setting screen.  
Press Time-out Interval to display the re-  
quired time lapse.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed, according to the fol-  
lowing sequence.  
01 02 03 .... 09 10 01 ....  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count  
The NT31/NT31C does not immediately display an error screen when a commu-  
nication error occurs, but tries to re-establish communication. The Retry Counts  
setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communica-  
tion. If communication cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the  
following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm. Auto-return  
memory switch (page 183).  
Comm. Auto-return ON:  
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen.  
Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts, attempts to re-establish  
communication are repeated until normal communication is achieved.  
Comm. Auto-return OFF:  
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the  
OK touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately be-  
fore is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communication.  
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any  
two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.  
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.  
Reference: For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and  
Their Remedies (page 239).  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Section 6-9  
Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the third memory switch  
setting screen.  
Set a number of times in the input field to the  
right of Retry Counts.  
Each of the digits can be incremented or  
decremented by pressing the associated +  
and keys.  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function  
Section 6-10  
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function  
The NT31/NT31C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code  
reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into char-  
acter string input fields.  
This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader  
and the setting method for confirming the input data.  
Reference: S For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4  
Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a  
bar code reader refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in  
the Reference Manual.  
S The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial port B  
must be used for communications with the host.  
Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers  
Setting Item  
Data bit length  
Stop bit length  
Parity bit  
Function  
Sets the bit length for the data bits.  
Sets the stop bit length for the data.  
Sets the parity bit for the data.  
Setting Options  
7* or 8 bits  
Page  
Page 189  
Page 189  
Page 189  
1 or 2* bits  
None, odd, even*  
Communications Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader  
speed  
4800, 9600*, or 19200 Page 189  
bps  
Input method  
Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a char-  
acter string input field.  
Manual*, Auto  
Page 189  
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The data  
can be corrected and character strings can be added.  
Auto:  
The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.  
* Default (factory) setting  
Setting the  
Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation  
at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Communication  
Conditions and Setting  
Method  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Memory Switch.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function  
Section 6-10  
Press [] (next screen) or [] (previous  
screen) to display the fourth memory switch  
setting screen.  
Press Comm. A Method to select Bar-Code  
Reader.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
Press the Set touch switch to the right of  
Comm. A Method.  
Display the required setting for each item by  
pressing the touch switches.  
The setting option changes each time the  
touch switch is pressed.  
Press Quit.  
Pressing Abort on the communication condition/confirmation method setting  
screen causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the memory switch setting screen  
(4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).  
On completion of communication condition/confirmation method setting, the  
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function  
Section 6-10  
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next  
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.  
To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the  
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will  
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press  
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
6-11 System Maintenance  
The NT31/NT31C has the following maintenance and check functions.  
Item  
I/O Settings  
Function  
Page  
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.  
Display and setting of the time data of the NT31/NT31C clock function.  
Page 191  
Page 195  
Calendar Check  
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C and display of the  
setting statuses of the serial ports.  
PT Settings  
Page 197  
Display history record Display and printing of display history record data.  
Page 198  
Page 200  
Page 202  
Page 205  
Page 215  
Alarm history record  
Screen data check  
Display and printing of alarm history record data.  
Display of each screen stored in the NT31/NT31C.  
Device check Checking of the I/O functions of the NT31/NT31C.  
I/O  
check  
I/F check  
Checking of the communication functions of the NT31/NT31C.  
This section describes how to use these functions.  
6-11-1 I/O Settings  
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the bright-  
ness of the backlight.  
With the NT31/31C, you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using  
either of the following two methods.  
Setting from the System Menu  
Adjusting the contrast: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/  
Contrast Adjust.  
Adjusting the brightness: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/  
Brightness Adjust.  
Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation  
You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the follow-  
ing number, using a touch switch with a switch screen function, or by specifying  
the display screen in the PT status control area.  
Screen number 9030: Brightness and contrast adjustment screen.  
Contrast Adjustment  
The NT31/NT31C allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps. The CON-  
TRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually  
checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set, it remains  
in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset (and even if  
the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Setting from the System Menu  
Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the  
System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Settings.  
Select Contrast Adjust.  
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in  
the left half of the screen.  
[
[
[
[
]: Increase 10 steps  
Y]:  
B]:  
Increase 1 step  
Decrease 1 step  
]: Decrease 10 steps  
Press Quit.  
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C  
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU  
screen.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen  
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func-  
tion, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.  
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in  
the right half of the screen.  
[
[
[
[
]: Increase 10 steps  
Y]:  
B]:  
Increase 1 step  
Decrease 1 step  
]: Decrease 10 steps  
Press Quit.  
The contrast is set, and the NT31/NT31C  
returns to the previous screen.  
Backlight Brightness  
Adjustment  
The NT31/NT31C allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted in 3  
steps. The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment  
while actually checking the brightness on the screen. The length of hours the  
backlight lasts in a normal temperature are as follows.  
High contrast:  
10000 hours  
Low, middle contrast: 25000 hours  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Setting from the System Menu  
Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Settings.  
Select Brightness Adjust.  
Adjust the contrast with the High, Middle, and  
Low touch switches in the left half of the  
screen.  
Press Quit.  
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C re-  
turns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen  
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func-  
tion, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.  
Adjust the brightness with the touch switches  
(High, Middle, Low) in the left half of the  
screen.  
Press Quit.  
The brightness is set, and the NT31/NT31C  
returns to the previous screen.  
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock  
The NT31/NT31C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date and  
time.  
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation  
from the System Menu.  
Reference: S The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week set-  
tings. When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and day of  
the week. If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in the range 13  
to 19 when entering the month — the buzzer sounds three times.  
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.  
S Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function. Clock  
data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT31/NT31C by using  
these numeral memory tables.  
S For details on the clock function, refer to 2-15-6 Clock Function in the Refer-  
ence Manual.  
S
N
o
c
l
o
c
k
d
a
t
a
i
s
s
e
t
o
n
s
h
i
p
m
e
n
t
f
r
o
m
t
h
e
f
a
c
t
o
r
y
.
S The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT31/NT31C. If the  
battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained when the pow-  
er to the NT31/NT31C is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset and the clock  
function will not operate correctly.  
S When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for  
System Setting in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set the date  
and time.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Calendar Check.  
Press Set.  
If you are just checking the display, press  
Quit at this point; the NT31/NT31C will return  
to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU  
screen.  
Set the date.  
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,  
hour, minute, and second settings, and the  
day of the week setting, are touch switches:  
press these touch switches to change the cor-  
responding settings.  
Press Quit.  
The clock data is set and the NT31/NT31C re-  
turns to the date and time display.  
Pressing Abort causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the date and time display  
without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status  
The direct connection settings of the NT31/NT31C screen data, and the settings  
for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.  
Screen Configuration and Display Contents  
There are the following three PT setting status screens.  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
[ ] (next screen)  
[ ] (previous screen)  
Display Contents of The First Screen  
Item  
Meaning  
Screen Data Type  
PT Control Area  
The host type set for the screen data  
Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allo-  
cated  
PT Notification Area Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allo-  
cated  
Window Control  
Area  
Word at the host to which the window control area is allo-  
cated  
Numeric Expression Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of  
host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated  
(numeric value storage method).  
Expansion I/F  
Compatibility  
Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector  
Sets whether or not to use NT30/620 compatible mode for  
screen data. (Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31/631  
or emulate many key NT30/620 characteristics.)  
Display Contents of The Second Screen  
Item  
Meaning  
Comm. Port A  
Comm. Method  
Comm. Setting  
Communication type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)  
Communication method set for serial port A  
Communication conditions set for serial port A (display con-  
tents differ according to the communication method)  
Display Contents of The Third Screen  
Item  
Meaning  
Comm. Port B  
Communication type set for serial port B  
(RS-232C/RS-422A)  
Comm. Method  
Comm. Setting  
Communication method set for serial port B  
Communication settings set for serial port B (display con-  
tents differ according to the communication method)  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Display Method  
Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System  
Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select PT Settings.  
Switch the screen as required by pressing the  
[] (next screen) or [] (previous screen)  
touch switch.  
Press Quit.  
The NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTE-  
NANCE MODE MENU screen.  
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record  
The display history record function is a function that records the order of display  
of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is dis-  
played. Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been  
set in advance are processed by this function.  
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the  
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.  
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data  
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.  
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (display time order)  
and sort by frequency (order of number of times displayed).  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Reference: S With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by calling screen  
No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency) during  
the RUN mode.  
S For details on the display history record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display Histo-  
ry Record Function in the Reference Manual.  
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from  
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 179).  
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the  
Printer Controller (page 172) and Print Method (page 174) memory switches.  
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation  
from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Display History.  
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre-  
quency.  
If necessary, select the next or previous  
screen by pressing [] (next screen) or []  
(previous screen).  
The example screen to the left shows a  
display for the sort by occurrence method  
(from oldest record).  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
If required, press Prt. to print the display his-  
tory record data.  
Press Quit.  
The NT31/NT31C returns to the DISPLAY  
HISTORY MENU screen.  
Example Print-out  
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis-  
played screen.  
Example:  
Sort by occurrence, from oldest record  
No. Scrn YY/MM/DD HH:MM Comment  
01/01  
1
2
3
4
1
2
98/01/12  
98/01/12  
98/01/13  
98/01/13  
10:21 Coolant Error  
11:53 Motor Error  
8
09:35 Compressor Error  
14:22 Emergency Stop  
2000  
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record  
The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors, during  
operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory  
table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times  
they come ON.  
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the  
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.  
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data  
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.  
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (ON time order) and  
sort by frequency (order of number of times the bits have come ON).  
Reference: S With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by registering an  
alarm history display element on the screen.  
S For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 2-15-2 Alarm History  
Record Function in the Reference Manual.  
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from  
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 179).  
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the  
Printer Controller (page 172) and Print Method (page 174) memory switches.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation  
from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Alarm History.  
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre-  
quency.  
If necessary, select the next or previous  
screen by pressing [] (next screen) or []  
(previous screen).  
The example screen to the left shows a dis-  
play for the sort by occurrence method (from  
oldest record).  
If required, press Prt. to print the display his-  
tory record data.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Press Quit.  
The NT31/NT31C returns to the ALARM  
HISTORY MENU screen.  
Example Print-out  
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis-  
played screen.  
Example:  
Sort by occurrence method, from oldest record  
No. Comment  
YY/MM/DD HH:MM 01/01  
1
2
3
Remote I/O Error  
98/02/06  
98/02/07  
98/02/17  
16:02  
09:21  
15:44  
PIC Unit Error  
Cycle Time Over  
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data  
The NT31/NT31C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed  
and checked by operation from the System Menu.  
Reference: S Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu.  
S Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system  
use cannot be displayed.  
Specifying The Display Method  
Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.  
Setting  
Setting Item  
Function  
Options  
Display of Lamp/  
Touch SW No.  
Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch  
switch is displayed or not.  
ON, OFF*  
The display format is as follows L  
j
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
(
j
:
a
r
e
a
t
y
p
e
,
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
:
b
i
t
number).  
Display of Memory Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string  
ON, OFF*  
Table No.  
memory tables are displayed or not.  
The display format for numeral memory tables is N  
f
f
f
f
a
n
d
t
h
e
d
i
s
p
l
a
y
f
o
r
m
a
t
f
o
r
character string memory tables is S  
f
f
f
f
.
This function is valid for the following display elements.  
- Numeral displays  
- Character string displays  
- Bar graphs  
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)  
- Character string input fields  
Display of image/  
Library No.  
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.  
ON, OFF*  
Display of Broken Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the dis- ON, OFF*  
Line Frame play elements for showing the positions registered.  
* Default (factory) setting  
Reference: Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting from  
this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the settings are  
set to OFF).  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen  
The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen.  
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multi-  
ple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.  
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)  
c)  
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)  
a) Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the  
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (ex-  
cluding fixed display elements).  
b) Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen  
in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding  
fixed display elements).  
c) Return to the screen on which screens are specified.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Displaying the SCREEN  
DATA CHECK Screen  
Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation  
from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select Screen Data Disp.  
Specify the screen to be displayed in the input  
field in the middle of the screen.  
Each of the digits can be incremented or  
decremented by pressing the associated +  
and keys.  
Press Set.  
Press the touch switches to specify the dis-  
play method in each case.  
The setting option changes each time a touch  
switch is pressed.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Press Quit to return to the screen number  
selection screen.  
Press Disp.  
Touching the top or bottom of the screen  
changes the way the display elements over-  
lap each other in the order in which they are  
registered.  
BOILER OPERATION  
T 015003  
RUN  
T 015301  
STOP  
T 016312  
ERROR  
L 020000  
L 020005  
L 020013  
Start  
Confirmation  
Stop  
Confirmation  
Error  
Occurrence  
In this example, the bottom portion of the  
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be  
displayed over the lamp.  
When you have finished checking the screen,  
press the central part of the screen to return  
to the screen number selection screen.  
BOILER OPERATION  
T 015003  
T 015301  
STOP  
T 016312  
ERROR  
RUN  
L 020000  
L 020005  
L 020013  
Start  
Confirmation  
Stop  
Confirmation  
Error  
Occurrence  
If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation, start-  
ing by specifying the screen number.  
To end the operation, press Quit on the screen number selection screen. The  
NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.  
6-11-7 Device Check  
The NT31/NT31C provides checks on the functions of the following items.  
Buzzer  
LED  
LCD  
Backlight  
Screen data memory  
Touch switches  
Battery voltage  
Page 205  
Page 206  
Page 208  
Page 209  
Page 209  
Page 212  
Page 214  
Checking the Buzzer  
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Reference: The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzz-  
er Sound memory switch.  
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown  
below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select Buzzer Check.  
If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the  
Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.  
To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the Buzzer Check touch switch  
again.  
Checking the RUN LED  
Check if the RUN LED functions normally.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu  
shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select LED Check.  
If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this time the  
LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.  
Lit in green OFF lit in red OFF lit in green...  
To end the LED check, press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE  
CHECK MENU screen again.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking the LCD  
(Screen Display)  
Check if the LCD (screen display) functions normally by following the menu op-  
eration from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select LCD Check.  
The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on  
the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared.  
With the NT31C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is  
repeated for each color in turn (red green blue magenta cyan yellow white  
black).  
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT31/NT31C re-  
turns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.  
To abort the LCD check, press the top right corner of the touch panel. The  
NT31/NT31C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking the Backlight  
Check if the backlight functions normally by following the menu operation from  
the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select Backlight Check.  
If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the Backlight Check touch  
switch is displayed in reverse video.  
To end the backlight check, press the Backlight Check touch switch again.  
Screen Data Memory  
Check  
Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.  
Reference: S In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen data  
memory. Since all the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is lost in this check,  
confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before  
executing it.  
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Set-  
tings in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a screen data  
check.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
S
O
n
c
e
a
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
h
e
c
k
h
a
s
b
e
e
n
s
t
a
r
t
e
d
,
i
t
c
a
n
n
o
t
b
e
s
t
o
p
p
e
d
.
Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the Sys-  
tem Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select Screen Memory.  
Press Execute.  
During the check, the message Checking Now... is displayed.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
On normal completion of the check, the message Memory Check OK is dis-  
played.  
If an error is discovered in the check, the message Memory Check NG is dis-  
played.  
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to  
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking Touch  
Switches  
Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the  
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select Touch Switch.  
Press the touch switches displayed on the  
screen. A touch switch is normal if it is dis-  
played in reverse video while pressed.  
To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT31: displayed  
in reverse video; NT31C: displayed in yellow). The NT31/NT31C will return to  
the DEVICE CHECK MENU.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Reference: S The functions of touch switches pressed during the I/O check are not notified  
to the host.  
S The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is  
displayed in reverse video (for NT31) or displayed in yellow (NT31C). Start the  
check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking the Battery  
Voltage  
Check the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery by following the menu  
operation from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select Device Check.  
Select Battery.  
The voltage is within the normal range. or  
The voltage is lowered. is displayed.  
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to  
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed, replace the built-in battery immedi-  
ately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 7-3-1 Replacing the Bat-  
tery (page 244).  
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces  
The NT31/NT31C allows the following communication functions to be checked.  
Communication with the Support Tool Page 215  
Communication at serial ports  
Communication with printers  
Page 217  
Page 220  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking  
Communication with the  
Support Tool  
Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation  
from the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select I/F Check.  
Select Tool Comm..  
The check on communication with the Sup-  
port Tool starts.  
If communication with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the  
Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the  
NT31/NT31C.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
After confirming the result of the test, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to the  
I/F CHECK MENU screen.  
Checking  
Communication at Serial  
Ports  
Check communication at the serial ports (A, B).  
Check Screen  
The check screen and check method differ according to the communication  
method set for the port to be checked.  
For Host Link  
Example: Serial port A while using the host link  
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to  
the host, and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal.  
If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at  
Received Data in hexadecimal.  
If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions  
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates  
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and set-  
tings.  
For NT Link (1:1 or 1:N)  
Example: Serial port B while using the NT Link (1:N)  
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to  
the host, and is displayed as ∗∗ symbols at Sending Data.  
If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at  
Received Data as ∗∗ symbols.  
If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions  
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates  
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and set-  
tings.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
For Memory Link  
Example: Serial port A while using the memory link  
The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the com-  
mand from the host.  
If communication with the host is normal, the data received from the host is dis-  
played in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.  
If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the  
host, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and set-  
tings.  
For a Bar Code Reader  
The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar  
code reader in this status.  
If communication with the bar code reader is normal, the read character strings  
are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.  
If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code  
reader, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and  
settings.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Check Method  
Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from  
the System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select I/F Check.  
Select Comm. Port A or Comm. Port B.  
The check screen is displayed (Check  
screen, page 217).  
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to  
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Maintenance  
Section 6-11  
Checking  
Communication with a  
Printer  
Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the  
System Menu shown below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Maintenance Mode.  
Select I/O Check.  
Select I/F Check.  
Select Printer.  
Confirm that a printer is connected to the  
NT31/NT31C, then press Execute: Printer  
Interface Check will be printed out at the  
printer.  
While data is being sent to the printer, the message Checking Now... is dis-  
played.  
When the sending of data to the printer is completed, Finished Normal by Print-  
er Interface Check is displayed.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts, the  
message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.  
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to  
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.  
6-12 Programming Console Function  
The NT31/NT31C features has been equipped with the Programming Console  
function, which allows it to be used like a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Con-  
sole for CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E,  
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H, or SRM1 PCs.  
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying  
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be  
executed.  
Note When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that the  
system is safe before carrying out the following operations.  
Changing monitor data  
Switching the operating mode  
Forced set or reset  
Changing a present value or set value  
6-12-1 Usable Systems  
The Programming Console function can communicate with the PC with the com-  
munication methods indicated in the following table.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
Commu-  
nication  
Method  
Commu-  
nication  
Type  
Applicable PCs  
Connected Port  
(*1)  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
(*1)  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
CPM2A-30CD  
CPM2A-40CD  
CPM2A-60CD  
j
j
j
j -  
j -  
j -  
j
j
j
CPU built-in RS-232C  
port  
(*2)  
(*2)  
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
j
NT Link  
(1:1)  
CPM2C-20  
j
j
(*1)  
j
-
CQM1-CPU4j -EV1  
(*1)  
CQM1H-CPU21  
(*1)  
CQM1H-CPU51  
(*1)  
CQM1H-CPU61  
RS-232C  
SRM1-C02-V2  
CPM1-10CDR-  
CPM1-20CDR-  
j
j
CPM1A-10CDj -  
CPM1A-20CDj -  
CPM1A-30CDj -  
CPM1A-40CDj -  
j
j
j
j
(*3)  
Peripheral port  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
(*1)  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
S CPU built-in  
RS-232C port  
NT Link  
(1:N)  
(*4)  
S
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
p
o
r
t
*1: The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority. If a Programming  
Console is connected later, the Programming Console function of the  
NT31/NT31C is invalidated and operation from the NT31/NT31C becomes  
impossible.  
*2: The CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PC’s Communication Port into a  
RS-232C port and a peripheral port.  
*3: An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C  
adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is required.  
*4: The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An  
RS-232C converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.  
Reference: Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,  
and C200HX/HG/HE PCs of the following lot numbers.  
CPM1:  
j
j
j5,  
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.  
j3, j4, j5, j*6  
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.  
C200HX/HG/HE: j5 j*6  
j
j
*
6
CQM1:  
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
6-12-2 Connection Method  
CQM1, CQM1H,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), or  
SRM1  
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Refer to  
Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connect-  
ing to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.  
* When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H, turn ON pin 7 of  
the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H’s CPU Unit.  
CPM1 or CPM2A  
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). With a CPM1, con-  
nect the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C  
Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.  
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to  
the PC.  
CPM2C  
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s  
communications connector with a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Con-  
necting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A  
Adapter.  
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to  
the PC.  
* When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C, turn ON pin 2 of  
the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C’s CPU Unit.  
CS1G/CS1H  
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:N) (standard or  
high-speed). Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port  
or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on  
connecting to the PC. The standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link can be used.  
The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT’s unit num-  
ber is set to 0. Only one unit using the Programming Console function can be  
connected to each of the PC’s ports (built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port).  
With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used simulta-  
neously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port. Furthermore, the  
Programming Console function can be started at the RS-232C port while a Pro-  
gramming Console is connected to the peripheral port.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
6-12-3 Method of Use  
The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu  
as described below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Expansion Mode.  
Select Programming Console.  
The Programming Console screen is dis-  
played.  
Press the Programming Console sheet keys  
(touch switches) for the operation.  
Press the Quit touch switch to exit the  
screen.  
An error is displayed if a wrong communica-  
tion protocol is selected or a Programming  
Console is connected to the peripheral  
(*1)  
port.  
*1: With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used  
simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.  
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, the system menu can be displayed by press-  
ing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. The Check touch  
switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu, but it will not  
work unless the cause of the error has been removed. If the system menu is not  
displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed, press two of the four corners  
of the touch panel to return to the system menu.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
Key Operations  
Mode Selection Keys, Mode Lock Key  
The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below com-  
prises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PC,  
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.  
Mode selection keys  
Mode lock key  
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch  
switches and pressing them causes the PC operation mode to change (unlike an  
actual Programming Console, it is possible to switch directly between the RUN  
mode and the PROGRAM mode.)  
When the Programming Console function is started, the PC operation status is  
read and reflected at the PC.  
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between the  
lock ON (with no key displayed) and lock OFF (with key displayed) states when  
pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are ineffec-  
tive. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock  
ON status and during the lock OFF status.  
When the Programming Console function starts, the lock ON status is estab-  
lished.  
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock  
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.  
During Lock OFF  
RUN mode  
MONITOR mode  
PROGRAM mode  
During Lock ON  
RUN mode  
MONITOR mode  
PROGRAM mode  
Programming Console Keyboard  
The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Program-  
ming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by  
the dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a key  
operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size  
of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to press as  
close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.  
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console  
key sheet for the CS1 series is automatically displayed.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Function  
Section 6-12  
Standard Programming Console Key Sheet  
Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series  
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles  
Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to  
store or read a program, use a Programming Device.  
It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or not  
the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press  
Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C. It sounds when the setting is ON  
and does not when the setting is OFF (page 170).  
If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function, an error  
screen is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is deter-  
mined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C  
(page 171).  
Reference: A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console function  
to change the communications settings (in the PC’s PC Setup) that govern the  
port to which the NT31/NT31C is connected. In this case, the Programming Con-  
sole function will be unusable.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device Monitor Function  
Section 6-13  
6-13 Device Monitor Function  
The NT31/NT31C has been equipped with the Device Monitor function which  
can be used to change the PC’s operating mode, read/change words in the PC’s  
data areas, and display the PC’s error log of a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A,  
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1.  
The Device Monitor can perform the following operations:  
Changing the PC’s operating mode  
Displaying/changing the contents of words, displaying/changing the status of  
bits, force-setting/force-resetting the status of bits (Registration Monitor)  
Listing the contents of a range of words (Continuous Monitor)  
Displaying the error log and clearing errors (Error Log)  
This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains  
how to connect to the PC. For more details, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Func-  
tion in the Reference Manual.  
Caution Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to per-  
form one of the following operations from the PT.  
Changing monitored data  
!
Switching the PC’s operating mode  
Force setting or force resetting bits  
Changing PVs or SVs  
Reference: S The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver. 3.0 and higher versions of  
the PT system program only.  
S The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data  
Access Console (DAC).  
S The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link com-  
munications.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device Monitor Function  
Section 6-13  
6-13-1 Compatible Systems  
The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and  
PCs that can support the PT’s Device Monitor function.  
Communications  
method  
PC model  
*1  
*1  
1:1 NT Link  
C200HS-CPU21-E  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
CPM1-10CDR-  
CPM1-20CDR-  
j
j
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
CPM1A-10CDj -  
CPM1A-20CDj -  
CPM1A-30CDj -  
CPM1A-40CDj -  
j
j
j
j
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CPM2A-30CD  
CPM2A-40CD  
CPM2A-60CD  
j
j
j
j -  
j -  
j -  
j
j
j
*2  
*2  
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -  
j -  
j
j
CPM2C-20  
j
j
j
CQM1-CPU4j -EV1  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
SRM1-C02-V2  
1:N NT Link  
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
SRM1-C02-V2  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
*1: A CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter is required.  
*2: Use a Conversion Cable (CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118), CPM1-CIF01  
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect to the PC.  
6-13-2 Connection Method  
CQM1H or  
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)  
The 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly  
the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to  
the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the  
RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.  
CQM1 or C200HS  
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly the same as for  
the 1:1 NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C  
Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details  
on connecting to the PC.  
CPM1, CPM2A, or SRM1  
The 1:1 NT Link can be used in all CPUs and the 1:N NT Link can also be used in  
-V2 and higher versions of the SRM1. The connection method is exactly the  
same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C  
cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter or  
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.  
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to  
the PC.  
CPM2C  
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is the same as for the NT  
Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s communications connector with a CPM2C-  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device Monitor Function  
Section 6-13  
CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C  
Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.  
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to  
the PC.  
CS1G/CS1H  
The 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed) can be used. The connection method  
is exactly the same as for the 1:N NT Link.  
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to  
the PC.  
6-13-3 Method of Use  
The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de-  
scribed below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Expansion Mode.  
Select Device Monitor.  
An error message will be displayed  
if the wrong communications proto-  
col is selected.  
The Device Monitor screen is displayed.  
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, press the Check touch switch on the screen  
to return to the system menu. In addition, pressing two of the four corners of the  
touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system  
menu.  
For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function, refer to 2-16 De-  
vice Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Version Display  
Section 6-14  
6-14 Version Display  
Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT31/NT31C’s sys-  
tem program. The Version Display screen shows the model, creation date, and  
version of the system program installed in the NT31/31C.  
6-14-1 Method of Use  
The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de-  
scribed below.  
Ver 3.10  
Select Expansion Mode.  
Select Version Display.  
The system program’s version information will be  
displayed as described below. Press the Quit  
touch switch to exit the Version Display screen  
and return to the Expansion Mode screen.  
PT Model:  
PT model number  
System program: System program name  
Version  
System program version  
Date  
Date program was created.  
This screen is an example. Actual screens will  
show the information specific to the PT and sys-  
tem program being used.  
After checking the version information, press the Quit touch switch to exit the  
Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen.  
Reference: S The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT.  
The B suffix will not be displayed, even for black models.  
S The system program’s version number is also displayed in the upper-right cor-  
ner of the System Menu.  
S The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program  
installed with the System Installer.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 7  
Troubleshooting and Maintenance  
This section describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to  
prevent the occurrence of errors.  
7-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
232  
235  
235  
237  
238  
239  
239  
241  
244  
245  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Section 7-1  
7-1 Troubleshooting  
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT31/NT31C occurs, find the symp-  
toms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy in-  
dicated in the table.  
Note 1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.  
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.  
NT31/NT31C Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power LED fails to come  
ON  
Power is not being supplied.  
Check the connections and make sure that power is  
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 Power Supply Connection,  
page 33)  
Power supply fuse has blown.  
Contact your OMRON service center.  
Nothing is displayed on  
the screen.  
Screen No. 0 has been read at the  
host side.  
This is not an error. Change the screen number  
from screen number 0. (Setting the screen number  
to 0 turns the screen off.)  
The system startup waiting time has This is not an error. The display will appear after the  
not elapsed yet.  
waiting time has elapsed.  
Cannot communicate with The Transmit mode has not been  
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit  
mode. (6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data, page 155)  
the Support Tool  
established.  
Not connected to the Support Tool.  
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2  
Connecting to the Support Tool, page 35)  
The PT model setting and direct  
connection setting at the Support  
Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support  
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection  
Tool do not match the NT31/NT31C. settings that match the NT31/NT31C.  
Cannot communicate with Memory switch settings do not  
Check the communication setting in the Memory  
Switch menu of the Maintenance mode, and match  
the communication protocol settings for the host and  
NT31/NT31C. (6-7 Setting Conditions for  
Communications with Host by Using Memory  
Switches, page 157)  
the host  
match.  
Cannot switch from the  
system initializing screen.  
Communication error  
message is displayed  
when communicating to  
the host.  
NT31/NT31C and host are not  
correctly connected.  
Check that the type, length, and installation of the  
connector cable match the specifications. (Section 4  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and  
Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the  
RS-422A/485 Port)  
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the  
terminator setting is incorrect.  
Make the NT31/NT31C and PC termination  
resistance settings correctly. (Section 4 Connecting  
to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5  
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port)  
In an NT Link (1:N) connection, there Make the settings again so that there is no  
is duplication in the unit numbers.  
duplication. (6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method  
(Standard/High-speed), page 163)  
The power to the NT31/NT31C,  
NT-AL001 or host is OFF.  
Check the power supply.  
The buzzer has sounded  
and the RUN LED is OFF.  
Malfunction due to external noise  
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
The NT31/NT31 has developed  
trouble.  
Contact your OMRON service center.  
The touch panel does not Malfunction due to external noise  
respond.  
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
The touch panel is broken.  
Test the touch panel with I/O Check in the  
MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error,  
contact your OMRON service center.  
The PC mode has  
changed to the monitor  
mode.  
The NT31/NT31C changes the mode This is an NT31/NT31C specification. When using a  
when host link communication is  
used.  
PC that can also be connected using the NT Link  
method, use an NT Link connection (there is no  
mode change with the NT Link method).  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Section 7-1  
NT31/NT31C Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The graph display does  
not change.  
One of the percentage display  
settings — 100%, 0%, or 100% —  
is incorrect.  
Set the 100%, 0%, and 100% values in the  
following relationship:  
100% value < 0% value < 100% value  
The trend graph display  
does not agree with the  
actual time axis.  
The cycle for graph display update  
processing is longer than the set  
sampling cycle.  
Delete other elements on the same screen as the  
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have  
a high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling  
cycle.  
The Programming  
Console function cannot  
be used.  
The communication settings are  
incorrect.  
Set the communication method as follows when  
using the Programming Console function.  
S With C-series PLC: 1:1 NT Link  
S With CS1-series PLC:  
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)  
A Programming Console is  
connected.  
It is not possible to use a Programming Console and  
the Programming Console function at the same  
time. Disconnect the Programming Console.  
The PC does not support the  
Programming Console function.  
Not all PCs support the Programming Console  
function. Check the model of PC you are using.  
(6-12 Programming Console Function, page 221)  
The system program for other  
vendor’s PCs has been installed.  
(PC models other than OMRON.)  
The Programming Console function can be used  
only when the system program for OMRON PCs is  
installed. Install the correct system program.  
The Device Monitor  
function cannot be used.  
The communications settings are not Set the communication method as follows when  
correct.  
using the Device Monitor function.  
S
W
i
t
h
C
-
s
e
r
i
e
s
P
L
C
s
:
1
:
1
N
T
L
i
n
k
o
r
1
:
N
N
T
L
i
n
k
S With CS1-series PLCs:  
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)  
The PC does not support the Device Not all PCs support the Device Monitor function.  
Monitor function.  
Check the model of PC you are using. Refer to 6-13  
Device Monitor Function for details.  
The system program installed in the  
PT is for a PC maker other than  
OMRON.  
The Device Monitor function can be used only when  
the PT is connected to a PT with the system  
program for OMRON PCs installed. Install a system  
program that supports the Device Monitor function.  
The memory table display Since the memory table is allocated  
When the contents of the memory table are set as a  
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the  
host.  
contents differ from the  
initial value set at the  
Support Tool.  
to the host memory, the display is  
updated in accordance with the  
contents of the host memory.  
The battery voltage has dropped and Replace the battery and execute memory table  
the data in the memory table has  
been destroyed.  
initialization. (7-3-1 Replacing the Battery, page 244,  
and 6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables, page 147)  
Since ON is set for the resume  
function, the initial values of the  
screen data memory are not written  
to the memory tables.  
Execute memory table initialization. (6-4-5  
Initializing the Memory Tables, page 147)  
If the resume function does not need to be used,  
use the NT31/NT31C with the resume function OFF.  
(6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function, page 181)  
The numeral memory table is  
specified as the destination for a  
mathematical table’s results.  
Calculations are executed continuously while the PT  
is operating and the calculation results are  
automatically written to the memory table. Specify  
another numeral memory table or a word in the  
host.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Section 7-1  
NT31/NT31C Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
Updating of numeric  
values and text is  
delayed.  
Malfunction due to external noise  
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
There are too many numeral/text  
displays on the displayed screen.  
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the  
screen for which updating is delayed.  
The cycle time is extended due to  
heavy processing at the host.  
Shorten the host cycle time.  
In an RS-422A/485 connection,  
there is illegal branching or an  
erroneous terminator setting.  
Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 Connecting  
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
Some of the elements  
arranged on a normal  
screen are not displayed.  
The quantity of read data exceeds  
the stipulated restriction.  
Check the maximum number of elements by  
referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the  
Reference Manual. Create the screen data again  
and then transmit all of the screen data in a batch to  
the NT31/NT31C.  
The total of the element coefficients  
for the displayed screen is greater  
than 1024.  
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from  
Check the maximum number of elements by  
some of the set elements the host in screen units, the number referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the  
are not displayed.  
of elements on the overlapping  
screen has exceeded the maximum  
permissible without being checked  
by the Support Tool.  
Reference Manual. Create the screen data again  
and then send all the screen data in a batch to the  
NT31/NT31C.  
The System Menu cannot Display System Menu under Change In the System Installer mode, set Display System  
be called up.  
System Settings in the System  
Installer mode is set to Disabled.  
Menu to Enabled (page 153).  
The following System  
Menu operations are not  
possible.  
Screen Memory Protect under  
Change System Setting in the  
System Installer mode is set to  
Disabled.  
In the System Installer mode, set Screen Memory  
Protect to Enabled (page 153).  
- Establishing the  
Transmit mode  
- Displaying the memory  
switch setting screens  
Screen Memory Protect has been  
set to Disabled because the PT  
power supply was turned OFF during In the System Installer mode, first change the  
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of  
screen data.  
- Screen data memory  
check  
deletion of screen data.  
setting for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled, then  
repeat the screen data delete operation (pages 153  
and 154)  
- Displaying the  
initialization menu  
- Displaying the  
calendar/time setting  
screen  
Cannot input numeric  
values  
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit  
check for numeric value input is in  
effect.  
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.)  
limit check setting for numeric value input, and  
correct it if necessary. Refer to 2-12 Inputting  
Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details.  
Cannot input numeric  
values/character strings.  
Bit 5 of the PT status control area  
(numeral/character string input) is  
set to 1 (ON).  
Set bit 5 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status  
Control Area (Host PT) in the Reference Manual  
for details.  
The interlock function is set for the  
input field and the controlling  
interlock bit is OFF.  
Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the  
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status  
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.  
Window screen does not  
open  
Bit 6 of the PT status control area  
(PT window opening) is set to 1  
(ON).  
Set bit 6 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status  
Control Area (Host PT) in the Reference Manual  
for details.  
Cannot switch screens  
with touch switches  
Bit 4 of the PT status control area  
(PT screen switching) is set to 1  
(ON).  
Set bit 4 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status  
Control Area (Host PT) in the Reference Manual  
for details.  
Touch switch does not  
work. (Buzzer sounds.)  
The interlock function is set for the  
touch switch and the controlling  
interlock bit is OFF.  
Touch switches are disabled when the  
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status  
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
NT31/NT31C Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The display is dim.  
Insufficient contrast or brightness  
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 191 and  
193).  
Backlight defective, or its life has  
expired  
Replace the backlight (page 242).  
The display is too faint.  
The contrast is too high.  
Reduce the contrast (page 191).  
The digits in numeral  
display come out as *.  
The number of digits of a numeric  
value in a numeral memory table  
exceeds the set number.  
Confirm the values of the PC words allocated to the  
numeral memory table.  
Allocate one PC word to each numeral memory  
table.  
**” or ”***” is displayed  
in the numeral display or  
numeral input field.  
The numeric value in the numeral  
memory table exceeds the number  
of display digits.  
Check the values of the PC words allocated to the  
numeral memory table entry.  
Allocate only one word to each numeral memory  
table entry if the numeral display or numeral input  
field has 4 digits or less.  
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
When the NT31/NT31C displays an error message, find the corresponding  
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy  
indicated in the table.  
For details of the error messages displayed when using memory unit and correc-  
tive action to take for them, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C with  
Vj) in page 39 or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C without Vj) in page  
47.  
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies  
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the  
NT31/NT31C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.  
Message  
[No Comm. Protocol]  
Cause  
Remedy  
No communication protocol has  
been set.  
Using the memory switches, set the  
communication method to be used for  
communication with the host. (6-7 Setting  
Conditions for Communications with Host  
by Using Memory Switches, page 157)  
Set the comm. Protocol by  
MAINTENANCE MODE.  
Communication protocol and  
screen data type are mismatched  
[Screen Data Error]  
- The power was switched OFF  
during screen data  
initialization, checking, or  
transmission.  
Initialize the screen data memory by  
operation at the System Menu, then  
re-transmit the screen data. (6-4-1  
Clearing Screen Data, page 140)  
Screen Data corrupted.  
Initialize Screen Memory, and download  
Screen Data again.  
- Transmission of screen data  
was interrupted.  
If the problem persists, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
- Illegal data has been written to  
the screen data memory.  
[No Screen Data]  
No screen data is registered.  
Transmit screen data from the Support  
Tool.  
No Screen Data is saved in Screen  
Memory.  
Download Screen Data using by the  
Support Tool.  
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT  
MODE, and download Screen Data  
again.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
Message  
Cause  
Allocated words have not been  
set for the PT status control area area and PT status notify area with the  
Remedy  
[No Direct Connection Info.]  
Allocate words for the PT status control  
No Direct Connection Information is set  
in Screen Data.  
and PT status notify area.  
Support Tool and then transmit the direct  
connection information to the  
NT31/NT31C.  
Set Direct Connecting Information in  
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.  
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT  
MODE and download Screen Data  
again.  
[Incorrect Screen Data]  
The type of registered screen  
data does not match that at the  
NT31/NT31C.  
Initialize the screen data memory, then  
transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1  
Clearing Screen Data, page 140)  
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not  
match with the System Program.  
Initialize Screen Memory, and download  
Screen Data again.  
[No Starting Screen]  
No data is registered for either  
the screen number set in the PT  
status control area or the Initial  
Screen set with the Support Tool. Screen in the System settings under PT  
Or the screen number which  
does not exist are registered.  
Either specify a screen number for which  
data is registered at the PT status control  
area, or set the screen as the Initial  
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.  
Fix Screen Data using by the Support  
Tool.  
Configuration at the Support Tool.  
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT  
MODE and download Screen Data  
again.  
[Touch Panel is disconnected]  
The touch panel cable (film  
cable) inside the NT31/NT31C is  
disconnected.  
Contact your OMRON service center.  
[Memory Switch Corrupted]  
The memory switches have been Set the memory switches again using the  
initialized due to discovery of an  
error in the memory switch  
settings.  
System Menu and the System settings  
under PT Configuration at the Support  
Tool. (Section 6 System Menu Operation)  
Because Memory Switch setting was  
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.  
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM  
MENU.  
If the problem recurs, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
[Calendar Data Error]  
There is an error in the date/time Check the battery voltage by checking  
values due, for example, to low  
battery voltage.  
the color of the RUN LED and with the  
battery check in the System Menu; if the  
voltage is low, replace the battery with a  
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,  
page 214, and 7-3-1 Replacing the  
Battery, page 244)  
Calendar Data is incorrect.  
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and  
set Calendar Data.  
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be  
normal, set the calendar clock correctly  
from the System Menu. (6-11-2  
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and  
Clock, page 195)  
[Backup Data Error]  
Initialization has been executed  
because of an error in the  
backup data area.  
Check the battery voltage by checking  
the color of the RUN LED and with the  
battery check in the System Menu; if the  
voltage is low, replace the battery with a  
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,  
page 214, and 7-3-1 Replacing the  
Memory table and History data was  
initialized by backup failure.  
It can be caused by lowered voltage of  
the battery.  
Battery, page 244) The re-transmit the  
memory table data from the Support Tool.  
If the voltage is normal and the problem  
recurs, contact your OMRON service  
center.  
[With memory switch setting screen]  
Invalid Comm. Method  
Protocol settings for serial port A Refer to Possible Combinations of  
and serial port B are  
mismatched.  
Communication Method Settings in page  
158 and set the protocol of serial port A  
and serial port B so that their settings are  
matched.  
* Set serial port A to None when  
connecting the Support Tool and the host  
at the same time.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies  
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the  
NT31/NT31C and their remedies.  
Message  
Cause  
Remedy  
[Address Setting Error]  
The host side allocated words  
and bits set with the Support Tool area used at the host side by referring to PC  
are incorrect.  
Set correct words and bits after checking the  
Addressing Error exists in the  
Screen.  
Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference  
Manual or the operation manual for the PC  
being used.  
Correct address setting by the  
Support Tool.  
[Memory Table No. Error]  
The memory table number set  
with the Support Tool is outside  
the range for the number of  
memory tables set in the system number again within the established range.  
memory.  
Either increase the number of memory tables in  
the System settings under PT Configuration at  
the Support Tool, or set the memory table  
Memory table No. is out of limit.  
Correct the table No. by the  
Support Tool.  
[Programming Console Error]  
The communication settings are  
incorrect.  
Set the communication method/communication  
port as follows when using the Programming  
Console function.  
Setting of Programming Console  
Function is inadequate. It can be  
caused by:  
S
W
i
t
h
C
-
s
e
r
i
e
s
P
L
C
s
:
1
:
1
N
T
L
i
n
k
S This PLC does not support Pro-  
gramming Console Function.  
S With CS1-series PLCs:  
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)  
S Protocol mismatch. Set the PLC  
to NT Link.  
The PC used does not support  
the Programming Console  
function.  
Not all PCs support the Programming Console  
function. Check the model of the PC you are  
using. (6-12 Programming Console Function,  
page 221)  
S “PROGRAMMING CONSOLE”  
is connected to PLC.  
A Programming Console is  
connected.  
It is not possible to use a Programming Console  
and the Programming Console function at the  
same time. Disconnect the Programming  
Console.  
[Programming Consol Error]  
The connecting cable is  
defective.  
Check the cable connection and perform a  
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the  
cable.  
Programming Console Function  
does not RUN. It can be caused  
by:  
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
S
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
i
s
f
a
u
l
t
y
.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page  
34.  
S
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
I
N
G
C
O
N
S
O
L
E
is connected to PLC.  
A Programming Console is  
connected.  
It is not possible to use a Programming Console  
and the Programming Console function at the  
same time. Disconnect the Programming  
Console.  
S Protocol mismatch between the  
PT and PLC. Set the PLC to NT  
Link.  
The communication conditions at Set the communication conditions at the PC to  
the PC have been changed in  
accordance with the  
match the conditions set in the System Menu.  
NT31/NT31C Programming  
Console function.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission  
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT31/NT31C data is  
initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.  
Message  
Cause  
Remedy  
[Flash Memory Error]  
There is a hardware fault, or the  
flash memory (memory for  
storing screen data) has reached data several times, contact your OMRON  
If the same message is displayed even after  
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen  
Flash Memory I/O Error.  
If this happens frequently, Flash  
Memory may be broken.  
the end of its service life.  
service center.  
Press Reset Switch to restart.  
[Calendar Data Error]  
Hardware fault, or system  
program error  
Set the calendar clock again from the System  
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program  
in the System Installer mode, then re-install the  
program. (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System  
Program, page 151)  
Calendar Data is incorrect.  
Set to the MAINTENANCE  
MODE and set Calendar Data.  
If this does not solve the problem, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
[Tool Transmit Error]  
The connecting cable is  
defective.  
Check the cable connection and perform a  
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the  
cable. (Appendix F Making the Cable for  
Connecting a PC, page 269)  
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while  
downloading by the following  
case:  
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
S
f
a
u
l
t
y
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page  
34.  
S
c
o
r
r
u
p
t
e
d
d
a
t
a
b
y
n
o
i
s
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]  
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page  
34.  
Check Sum Error occurs while  
downloading by the following  
case:  
S
c
o
r
r
u
p
t
e
d
d
a
t
a
b
y
n
o
i
s
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]  
The connecting cable is  
defective.  
Check the cable connection and perform a  
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the  
cable.  
Time-out Error occurs while  
downloading by the following  
case:  
S
f
a
u
l
t
y
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]  
The receive buffer has  
overflowed.  
Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.  
Reception was failed by Buffer  
Over Flow Error.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies  
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of  
the NT31/NT31C, and the remedies for these errors.  
Message  
Cause  
Remedy  
System Program not exist or  
incorrect.  
- The system program has not  
been installed.  
Select Download System Program and  
download the system program (6-5-2  
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page  
151).  
- The system program has been  
deleted due to a hardware  
fault, or because the flash  
memory (memory for storing  
the system program) has  
reached its life.  
If this does not solve the problem, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
Unable to erase System  
Program.  
Hardware fault, or flash memory  
(memory for storing the system  
program) has reached its life.  
If the same message is displayed on repeating  
selection of Download System Program and  
attempting to delete the system program several  
times, contact your OMRON service center  
(6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program,  
page 151).  
Unable to download System  
Program.  
- A communication error  
occurred during downloading  
of the system program.  
Select Download System Program and  
download the system program again (6-5-2  
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page  
151).  
- Illegal data has been written  
into the screen data memory.  
Also refer to 7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen  
Data Initialization and Transmission (page 238),  
and take the corrective action described for tool  
transmission errors.  
- Hardware fault, or flash  
memory (memory for storing  
the system program) has  
reached its life.  
If this does not solve the problem, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
Unable to write System Settings. Hardware fault, or flash memory  
(memory for storing the system  
If the same message is displayed on repeating  
writing of system settings several times, contact  
your OMRON service center.  
program) has reached its life.  
If writing is normally terminated after the error  
message was once displayed, the Memory  
Switch setting for system program may have  
been altered. In such a case, check and re-set  
the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the  
Maintenance mode.  
Unable to erase Screen Data.  
Hardware fault, or flash memory  
(memory for storing the system  
program) has reached its life.  
If the same message is displayed on repeating  
screen data deletion several times, contact your  
OMRON service center.  
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies  
This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur dur-  
ing operation, and their remedies.  
Operation When a  
Communication Error  
Occurs  
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the  
NT31/NT31C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for Buzzer  
Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF. An error message is displayed  
provided the setting for the Comm. Auto-Return memory switch is not ON (note  
that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON).  
Operation When  
Communication Errors  
Occur  
When an error message is displayed, press the OK touch switch displayed on  
the screen. The NT31/NT31C will return to the screen that was displayed before  
the error occurred, and operation will restart.  
Display of  
Communication Errors  
For communication errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred, the  
error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the probable  
cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Responding to Displayed Error Messages  
Section 7-2  
Example:  
Parity error at serial port A  
Receive Errors  
The following errors can occur when receiving data.  
Parity error  
Framing error  
Overrun error  
FCS (sum value) error  
Time out error  
Data over flow error  
PC unit No. error (host link only)  
NAK received (in the case of the host link, the end code is also displayed)  
Undefined command error  
Send Errors  
The following errors can occur when receiving data.  
Time out error  
Data over flow error  
Probable Causes and  
Remedies  
The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the  
table below.  
Error Details  
Displayed Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Parity Error  
Communication parameters/  
conditions set incorrectly.  
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame  
length, communications speed, stop bit length and  
flow control agree with those at the NT31/NT31C.  
Framing Error  
Over-run Error  
The connecting cables are not  
connected correctly.  
Check the communication cable connection and  
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,  
replace the cable. For details on communication  
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host  
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting  
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
communication. conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
FCS (Check Sum) Error  
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
communication.  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
The PC is transmitting incorrect  
data.  
Check the operation at the host side.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 7-3  
Error Details  
Time-out Error  
Displayed Probable Cause  
The connecting cables are not  
connected correctly. (Send/Receive) perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,  
replace the cable. For details on communication  
Remedy  
Check the communication cable connection and  
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host  
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting  
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.  
The communication service of the  
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)  
Check that the host is capable of communicating  
with the NT31/NT31C (confirm that the  
communication settings of the host and  
NT31/NT31C match).  
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send) Set a longer value for Time-out Interval at the host  
side.  
Time-out Interval is too short.  
(Receive)  
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval in the  
System Menu. (6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval,  
page 185) It may also be possible to solve the  
problem by shortening the host cycle time.  
PC Unit No. Error  
NAK received  
The unit # does not match that set  
on the PC.  
Re-set the unit number at the host side to 0.  
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the  
communication.  
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.  
——  
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.  
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from  
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the  
power supply line.  
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot  
of noise, use a cable with a high degree of  
protection against noise for the transmission route.  
Also make the cable as short as possible.  
Undefined Command  
Error  
The host is not supported.  
Check the PC model used for the host.  
Instruction level 3 is not effective.  
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is  
level 1, 2, 3.  
Data Over Flow Error  
Communication command from the  
host is too long. (With memory link)  
Set flow control method in the host.  
Increase transmission interval.  
Command transmission to the host  
is not possible.  
Check the communication cable.  
Check the control method at the PT and the host.  
Increase the communication on speed when it to  
slow.  
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C  
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT31/NT31C is always  
used in its optimum condition.  
WARNING  
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any inter-  
nal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of  
these may result in electrical shock.  
Spare PT  
Backlight  
It is advisable to have a spare NT31/NT31C available to minimize system down-  
time in the event of an NT31/NT31C failure or if the screen display becomes diffi-  
cult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.  
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read  
easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the  
NT31/NT31C while it is mounted in an operation panel.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 7-3  
Replaceable Backlight Model  
NT31C-CFL01 (for both NT31 and NT31C)  
Guide to Backlight Replacement  
Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to be re-  
placed after about 25,000 hours when used at medium brightness (the figure is  
about 10,000 hours when used at the high brightness setting). However, the life  
of the backlight does vary, particularly in accordance with the temperature in the  
environment in which it is used, and it should be replaced when it is getting dim  
and the screen is getting hard to read.  
Notes on Replacing the  
Backlight  
Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.  
Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust  
or foreign bodies will enter the unit, and where no water will drip onto it.  
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT31/NT31C with your bare  
hands.  
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work.  
Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the cable. Do  
not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.  
Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.  
Replacing the Backlight  
Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.  
WARNING  
Switch OFF the NT31/NT31C power before replacing the back-  
light. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF the  
power supply.  
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high tempera-  
tures.  
Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:  
Procedure  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Turn the power supply to the NT31/NT31C OFF.  
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the  
printer cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit  
also.  
3. Open the cover of the CFL unit housing by following the procedure de-  
scribed below.  
a) Unscrew the screw in the center of the cover.  
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come  
out for some reason and falls inside the NT31/NT31C, it must be extri-  
cated without fail.  
b) Open the cover while pressing the tabs at its left and right inward.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 7-3  
c) When the cover has opened far enough, remove it.  
b
b
b
4. Remove the CFL unit by following the procedure described below.  
a) Disengage the connector.  
b) Sufficiently loosen the screw that secures the CFL unit.  
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come  
out for some reason and falls inside the NT31/NT31C, it must be extri-  
cated without fail.  
c) Shift the CFL unit to the right.  
d) Pull out the CFL unit.  
5. Fit a new CFL unit by following the procedure described below.  
a) Slot the projection on the left end of the CFL unit into the hole in the fixture  
inside the PT.  
b) Engage the CFL unit with the fixture inside the PT.  
Check that the CFL unit is in contact with the left end of the fixture and is  
parallel with the fixture during this engagement.  
c) Tighten the screw of the CFL unit to secure it.  
The tightening torque is 0.2 N@m.  
d) Engage the connector of the CFL unit with the connector of the  
NT31/NT31C so that the red cable is at the left side.  
Insert the connector so that it clicks firmly into place.  
Red cable  
White cable  
d
b
Backlight unit  
Fixture inside the NT31/NT31C  
6. Fit the cover and secure it with the screw.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C  
Section 7-3  
7. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the  
screws.  
8. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be  
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also  
perform a communication test with the host.  
Touch switch  
Backlight  
9. On confirming that all the tests in 8 can be executed normally, start opera-  
tion.  
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery  
The NT31/NT31C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.  
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT31/NT31C is used in a location where  
the ambient temperature is 25_C. If the temperature at the location of use is  
higher than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at suitable  
intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT31/NT31C.  
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced im-  
mediately when replacement becomes necessary.  
Battery Type  
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT31 and NT31C)  
Guide to Replacement  
Replace the battery in the following cases. The battery must be replaced within 5  
days.  
When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.  
When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when stopped).  
When the message The voltage is lowered. is displayed on switching on the  
power or resetting the NT31/NT31C.  
When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery  
check menu of the Maintenance mode.  
Battery Replacement Method  
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.  
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5 min-  
utes.  
Procedure  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.  
Reference: Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents cannot  
be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.  
2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left  
of the rear face of the NT31/NT31C and pull it toward you.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
Section 7-4  
3. Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable,  
and pull the connector straight out.  
4. Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the  
NT31/NT31C and fit the battery under the battery cover.  
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it  
faces to the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.  
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after  
disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be re-  
placed while the NT31/NT31C power is on, and in this case there is no time  
restriction.  
5. Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.  
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning  
Clean and inspect the NT31/NT31C regularly to ensure that it is always used in  
its optimum condition.  
Cleaning Method  
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to  
time as follows.  
In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particular-  
ly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the  
front sheet of the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.  
If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted neu-  
tral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.  
If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long peri-  
ods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove them  
during cleaning.  
Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.  
Inspection Method  
In normal environments, inspect the NT31/NT31C at intervals of between 6  
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very  
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.  
Items Required for The Inspection  
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.  
Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)  
Tester (or digital voltmeter)  
Industrial alcohol  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
Section 7-4  
100% cotton cloth  
Hygrometer (required in some cases)  
Thermometer (required in some cases)  
Synchroscope (required in some cases)  
Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)  
Points Inspected  
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the  
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that the  
values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT31/NT31C, for example by  
re-tightening screws.  
Point  
Inspection  
Inspection Details  
Fluctuation in power supply terminal  
Criterion  
Inspected  
Instrument  
Power supply  
voltage  
Permissible voltage fluctuation range Tester  
voltage  
(24 VDC 15% to +10%)  
Ambient  
environmental  
conditions  
Ambient temperature (temperature in the 0 to 50_ C  
Thermometer  
Hygrometer  
operation panel)  
Ambient humidity (humidity in the  
operation panel)  
35% to 85% RH  
Presence/absence of dust  
Dust must not be settled  
To be no looseness  
Visual inspection  
Philips screwdriver  
Philips screwdriver  
Mounting  
conditions  
Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.  
Connector connections of connecting  
cable  
To be fully inserted and locked, with  
no looseness  
Looseness of screws in external wiring  
To be no looseness  
Philips screwdriver  
Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection Visual inspection  
Components  
with limited  
lives  
Brightness of the backlight  
Must be sufficiently bright.  
Visual inspection  
Backlight life:  
Brightness is halved after about  
25,000 hours in use at medium  
brightness, or about 10,000 hours in  
use at high brightness.  
Note 1. Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.  
2. The disposal of the unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight)  
may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accor-  
dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local author-  
ity.  
Reference: Desire on replacing the NT31/NT31C  
When replacing the NT31/NT31C after discovering a fault during inspections,  
note the following points:  
S
B
e
s
u
r
e
t
o
s
w
i
t
c
h
t
h
e
p
o
w
e
r
O
F
F
b
e
f
o
r
e
s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
.
S After replacement, check that the new NT31/NT31C is not subject to the same  
error.  
S If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault  
as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON ad-  
dress indicated on the back cover of this book.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
General Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Rated power supply voltage  
Allowable power supply voltage range  
Allowable power interruption time  
Power consumption  
24 VDC  
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)  
No regulation  
15 W max.  
Operating ambient temperature  
Storage ambient temperature  
Operating ambient humidity  
Operating environment  
0 to +50_ C  
–20 to +60_ C  
35% to 85% (with no condensation)  
No corrosive gases  
Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between power supply terminals and panel)  
Noise resistance  
Normal mode:  
300 Vp-p  
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise time of 1 ns  
- 10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude  
2
Vibration resistance (operating)  
Shock resistance (operating)  
- 57 to 150 Hz with 1G {9.8 m/s } acceleration  
for 60 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions  
2
147 m/s {15G}  
3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions  
195 (W)   142 (H)   54 (D) mm  
Dimensions  
Weight  
(With expansion unit mounted: 195 (W)   142 (H)   74 (D) mm)  
1 kg max.  
184 +0.5 × 131+0.5 mm  
0
0
Panel cutout dimensions  
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm  
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4)*  
D-type grounding (Ground to 100 or less)  
Enclosure ratings  
Grounding  
* The NT31/NT31C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
Performance Specifications  
Display Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
NT31:  
Monochrome STN LCD (with backlight)  
NT31C: Color STN LCD (with backlight)  
320 dots horizontally   240 dots vertically  
Display device  
Number of dots (resolution)  
Size of a standard character  
Effective display area  
NT 31-ST121j -EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm  
NT 31C-ST141j -EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm  
118.2 mm horizontally   89.4 mm vertically (5.7 inches)  
NT31:  
Up:  
20  
_
_
Down:  
30  
Left/right: "30  
_
Display panel  
View angle  
NT31C: Up:  
Down:  
45  
_
_
60  
Left/right: "50  
_
NT31:  
Black, white (2 colors)  
Display color  
NT31C: 8 colors (and intermediate colors can be displayed with  
tiling patterns)  
Life expectancy  
(until brightness reduced by half)  
50,000 hours minimum  
Contrast adjustment  
Adjustable in 100 levels by operation at the touch panel  
At low or medium brightness : 25,000 hours minimum  
At high brightness : 10,000 hours minimum  
Can be replaced from the rear  
Life expectancy  
Backlight  
(white cold  
cathode tube)  
Replacement  
Brightness adjustment  
Automatic turn-off function  
POWER (green LED)  
Adjustable in 3 levels by touch switch operation at the touch panel  
Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on  
Lit while power is being supplied  
Lit in green : Running normally, Memory unit automatic transmission  
done  
Flash in green : Memory unit automatic transmission being  
executed, memory unit automatic transmission error  
Indicators  
RUN  
Lit in orange : Low battery voltage (during operation)  
Flash in red : Low battery voltage (when NT31/NT31C is stopped)  
*1: Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity  
Panel Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Resistive type  
192 (16 horizontally   12 vertically)  
Type :  
Number of switches:  
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen: 192  
Cell size:  
Input:  
NT31/NT31C 6.3   6.3 mm  
Touch panel  
Pressure-sensitive type  
Operating force: 1 N minimum  
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
External Interface Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Conforms to EIA RS-232C  
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)  
Serial port A  
Serial port B  
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6  
Serial communication  
EIA RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (selectable, by memory switch setting)  
D-SUB 25-pin connector (female)  
Parallel interface  
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector  
Expansion interface  
Dedicated connector  
Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the +5 V  
output of pin No. 6. The +5 V output of the unit delivers +5 V " 5% and 250 mA maximum.  
Programming Environment  
Item  
Specification  
Programming System Programming support software  
Programming Tool  
Programming support software: NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.0), by OMRON  
Special Features  
Item  
Specifications  
Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)  
ON:  
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a  
buzzer setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.  
OFF:  
Setting:  
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with  
no buzzer setting.  
Buzzer  
Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set  
“ERROR ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.  
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.  
Touch switches  
Touch switch input sound  
Maintenance function  
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds  
Setting:  
Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.  
- Memory switch setting  
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface  
- Setting condition confirmation function  
- Communication check function  
- Initialization of internal memory data  
- Display of display/alarm history data  
- Registered data test display function  
- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT31/NT31C  
- Backup of display/alarm history data  
- Backup of calendar and clock setting  
Battery backup  
Battery life:  
When voltage becomes low: RUN LED lights in orange or red  
The communication flag to the PC (BAT LOW) comes  
5 years (at 25_ C)  
ON (1).  
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not  
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT31/NT31C is reset, and when  
the operation mode is changed.  
Resume function  
Setting:  
Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
Item  
Specifications  
Functions: - Prints a hard copy of the screen display  
- Prints display/alarm histories  
Setting:  
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print  
Method”) in the memory switch menu.  
“ESC/P”, “Color”:  
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C  
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL  
Screen print function  
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:  
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,  
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82  
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”: Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,  
conforming to PC-PR201PL  
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:  
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,  
conforming to PCL 5  
However, the NT31 supports monochrome printing only.  
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock  
Calendar and clock function  
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu  
Executes functions equivalent to those of al C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console  
for CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1 (-EV1 only), CQM1H,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and SRM1 (C02-V2 only) PCs.  
Programming Console function  
Device Monitor function  
Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS1 series PLC.  
The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating mode,  
read/change words in the PC’s data areas, and display the PC’s error log.  
Compatible PCs include the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1, and CS1-series PCs.  
Mathematical function  
Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data. The  
calculation function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host  
words, executes the registered calculations, and writes the results.  
Arithmetic operators, logic operators, bit operators, and comparative operators can  
be used.  
Downloads the system program from the system installer  
Downloads/Upload the system program with a memory unit.  
System program  
transmission  
- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the  
Support Tool  
Transmission  
functions  
Screen data  
transmission  
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit.  
History data  
uploading  
Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
Communications Specifications  
For a Host Link , RS-232C Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-232C  
Start-stop synchronization  
Communications speed: 9600, 19200 bps  
Communications settings  
Data length:  
Stop bit:  
Parity:  
7 bits  
2 bits  
Even  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
1:1  
Connector  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
Max. 15 m*  
Communications protocol  
C-series SYSMAC WAY (1:N)  
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.  
RS-232C cable:Max. 2 m  
RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.  
For a Host Link , RS-422A Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-422A  
Start-stop synchronization  
Communications speed: 9600, 19200 bps  
Communications settings  
Data length:  
Stop bit:  
Parity:  
7 bits  
2 bits  
Even  
Connector  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
Communications protocol  
1:1  
Max. 500 m  
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)  
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-232C Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-232C  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
1:1  
Connector  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
*
Max. 15 m  
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.  
RS-232C cable:Max. 2 m  
RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-422A Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
Connector  
EIA RS-422A  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
1:1  
Max. 500 m  
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-232C  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
1:1 to 8  
Connector  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
*
Max. 15 m  
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.  
RS-232C cable:  
Max. 2 m  
RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.  
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
Connector  
EIA RS-422A/485  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
1:1 to 8  
Max. 500 m  
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-232C  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
1:1 to 8  
Connector  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
*
Max. 15 m  
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.  
RS-232C cable:  
Max. 2 m  
RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.  
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
Connector  
EIA RS-422A/485  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
1:1 to 8  
Max. 500 m  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Appendix A  
For a Memory Link , RS-232C Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
Communications settings  
Connector  
EIA RS-232C  
Start-stop synchronization  
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps  
Data length:  
Stop bit:  
7, 8 bits  
1, 2 bits  
Parity:  
None, even, odd  
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF  
Presence/absence  
Flow control:  
Response:  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
1:1  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
Max. 15 m*  
Memory link  
Communications protocol  
* When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:  
RS-232C: Max. 2 m  
RS-422A: Max. total length 500 m  
For a Memory Link , RS-422A Type  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-422A  
Start-stop synchronization  
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps  
Data length:  
Stop bit:  
7, 8 bits  
Communications settings  
1, 2 bits  
Parity:  
None, even, odd  
None, XON/XOFF  
Presence/absence  
Flow control:  
Response:  
Connector  
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
Communications protocol  
1:1  
Max. 500 m*  
Memory link  
For a Bar Code Reader  
Item  
Specification  
Communications standard  
EIA RS-232C  
Start-stop synchronization  
Communications speed: 4,800, 9600, 19200 bps  
Data length:  
Stop bit:  
7, 8 bits  
Communications settings  
1, 2 bits  
Parity:  
None, even, odd  
RS/CS  
Flow control:  
Connector  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)  
Number of units connected  
Transmission distance  
Communications protocol  
1:1  
Max. 15 m  
Non-protocol mode  
[STX]  
Data (0 to 40 bytes)  
[ETX]  
Data format  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Dimensions  
Body  
183.5 (7.22)  
POWER  
RUN  
142 (5.59)  
130.5 (5.14)  
5 (0.20)  
54 (2.13)  
195 (7.68)  
With memory unit installed  
(NT-MF261)  
Units: mm (inch)  
74 (2.91)  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
Mounting Dimensions  
Mounting panel  
Mounting fixture  
POWER  
RUN  
25 (0.98)  
153 (6.02)  
15.5 (0.61)  
5 (0.2)  
145 (5.71)  
34 (1.34) (min.)  
38 (1.5) (max.)  
Units: mm (inch)  
206 (8.11)  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)  
96 (3.78)  
10.2 (0.47)  
91 (3.58)  
24V  
DC  
26.7 (1.05)  
PRINTER  
PORT B  
PORT A  
5 (0.20)  
50 (1.97)  
60 (2.36)  
Units: mm (inch)  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an  
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For  
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001-E.  
Dimensions  
53.5  
(2.11)  
110 (4.33)  
omRon NT–AL001-E  
74.5 (2.93)  
4 (0.16)  
100.2 (3.94)  
(30)  
105 (4.13) max.  
(1.18)  
45 (1.77)  
30 (1.18)  
Units: mm (inch)  
30 (W)   114 (H)   100.2 (D) mm:  
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed  
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open  
30 (W)   114 (H)   119.5 (D) mm:  
Methods for Mounting and Removal  
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001-E) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.  
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.  
Mounting to a DIN Rail  
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the  
unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.  
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.  
(a)  
(b)  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Appendix C  
Removal from a DIN Rail  
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade  
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.  
Mounting to an Operation Panel  
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the  
convertor unit with screws.  
30  
(1.18)  
100  
(3.94)  
110  
(4.33)  
2-M4  
21  
(0.83)  
Units: mm (inch)  
Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thick-  
ness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Appendix C  
Specifications  
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.  
General Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Dimensions  
30 (W)   114 (H)   100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed  
30 (W)   114 (H)   119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open  
200 g max.  
Weight  
Operating ambient temperature  
Operating ambient humidity  
Rated power supply voltage  
Rated power supply current  
Rush current  
0 to 55_ C  
10% to 90% (with no condensation)  
+5 V " 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)  
150 mA max.  
0.8 A max.  
Insulation resistance  
20 Mor higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively  
and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger  
Dielectric strength  
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and  
functional ground terminal  
Leakage current: 10 mA max.  
No corrosive gases  
Operating environment  
Storage ambient temperature  
Vibration resistance  
20 to +75_ C  
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions  
2
Shock resistance  
Conforms to JIS C0912 47m/s , 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions  
Communications Specifications  
RS-232C Interface  
Item  
Specification  
Communications speed  
Transmission distance  
Connector  
Max. 115.2k bps  
Max. 2 m  
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)  
RS-422A/485 Interface  
Item  
Communications speed  
Transmission distance  
Connector  
Specification  
Max. 115.2k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)  
Max. 500 m  
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Appendix C  
DIP Switch Settings  
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.  
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.  
(Factory settings)  
ON  
NT–AL001-E  
R
om on  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)  
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance  
- OFF Terminator not set  
- ON Terminator set  
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type  
SW1-3  
OFF  
ON  
SW1-3  
OFF  
ON  
SW1-4  
2-wire type (RS-485)  
4-wire type (RS-422A)  
SW1-4  
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode  
SW1-5  
OFF  
ON  
SW1-6  
Continual sending  
SW1-5  
SW1-6  
SW1-6  
OFF  
Complies with CS control of RS-232C  
(Data sent at CS high)  
ON  
SW1-5  
OFF  
Complies with CS control of RS-232C  
(Data sent at CS low)  
ON  
When using the host link or 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending (set both SW1-5 and 6  
OFF).  
When using the 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed), set the RS-422A send mode to complies with CS control of  
RS-232C (i.e., one of SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).  
Note 1. Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.  
2. The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.  
3. Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device such as a PT  
(i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP  
switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the  
convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.  
4. When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H, CS1G/H model of OMRON  
PC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.  
SW1-5 SW1-6  
OFF  
ON  
5
6
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Appendix C  
Pin Arrangement  
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C  
interface connection.  
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.  
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block  
Terminal  
block pin  
No.  
Signal direction  
(convertor unit RS-422  
device)  
Signal name  
Abbreviation  
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Request to send ()  
CSA  
CSB  
Request to send (+)  
Receive data ()  
Receive data (+)  
Send data ()  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
Send data (+)  
SDB  
Signal ground  
SG (GND)  
Functional ground  
* The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.  
RS-232C Connector  
Signal direction  
(convertor unit RS-232C  
device)  
Connector  
Signal name  
pin No.  
Abbreviation  
1
1
2
3
4
Not used  
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
Send data  
Receive data  
SD  
RD  
RS  
Request to send  
(shorted to CS internally)  
5
6
7
8
9
Clear to send  
(shorted to RS internally)  
CS  
+5 V  
DR  
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor  
unit  
Data set ready  
(shorted to ER internally)  
Data terminal ready  
(shorted to DR internally)  
ER  
Signal ground  
SG  
* The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Appendix C  
Block Diagram  
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making  
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.  
RS-232C side  
D-SUB 9P CASE  
RS-422A/485 side  
8P terminal block  
POWER  
LED  
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec  
Convertor  
DC-DC  
R
1
Fuse  
6
IS_5 V  
IS_0 V  
FG  
+5 V  
L
L
REG  
9
2
SG  
SG  
Photocoupler  
R
R
R
RS-232C  
Dr/Rec  
3
4
SDB  
SDA  
2-wire type/  
3
SW1-6  
SW1-5  
4-wire type  
SW1-4  
RD  
SW1-3  
R
2
SD  
5
6
RDB  
RDA  
4
RS  
R
SW1-2  
Terminator  
5
CS  
RS-422A Dr  
7
DR  
7
8
CSB  
CSA  
8
ER  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C  
When transporting the NT31/NT31C, use the packaging intended for it.  
When storing the NT31/NT31C, observe the following conditions.  
Storage ambient temperature: –20 to +60_C  
Storage ambient humidity:  
35% to 85%  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Making the Cable  
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.  
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.  
Cable Preparation  
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.  
Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Cut the cable to the required length.  
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the  
shielding underneath.  
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.  
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.  
5. Fold back the shielding wire.  
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.  
(1)  
(2)  
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)  
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)  
(3)  
10  
(0.39)  
(4)  
5
(0.19)  
(5)  
(6)  
Units: mm (inch)  
Aluminum foil tape  
Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Cut the cable to the required length.  
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the  
shielding underneath.  
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.  
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making the Cable  
Appendix E  
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.  
(1)  
(2)  
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)  
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)  
(3)  
(4)  
5
(0.19)  
(5)  
Units: mm (inch)  
Vinyl tape  
Soldering  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.  
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.  
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.  
1 mm  
Soldering iron  
Heat-shrink tube  
(F, 1.5 mm dia., ȏ = 10 mm)  
4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.  
Heat-shrink tube  
Hood Assembly  
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.  
Aluminum foil tape  
End not connected to FG  
End connected to FG  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC  
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.  
Assembly of Connecting Cables  
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.  
25-pin Connector  
2
3
4
5
7
1
2
3
4
5
9
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
Personal computer  
Connector for peripheral devices on PT  
Shielding wire  
Connector hood  
Connector hood  
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood.  
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.  
Name  
Connector  
Model  
Remarks  
XM2D-2501  
XM2A-0901  
XM2S-2511  
XM2S-0911  
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side  
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side  
Connector hood  
Cable  
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side  
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side  
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.  
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG  
9-pin Connector  
2
2
RD  
SD  
3
3
SD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
RD  
7
4
RS  
Personal computer  
Connector for peripheral devices on PT  
8
5
CS  
5
9
SG  
Shielding wire  
Connector hood  
Connector hood  
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood.  
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.  
Name  
Connector  
Model  
Remarks  
XM2D-0901  
XM2A-0901  
XM2S-0911  
XM2S-0913  
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer  
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT  
Connector hood*  
Cable  
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON  
9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.  
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB  
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG  
* One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G  
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar  
Code Reader  
Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader.  
Wiring Method  
NT31/NT31C side  
Bar code reader side  
Abbr.  
Abbr.  
Pin No.  
SD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RD  
RS  
SD  
RD  
CS  
RS  
RS-232C  
interface  
CS  
ER  
SG  
+5 V  
+5 V  
SG  
When using the +5 V output of the NT31/NT31C, limit the cable length to within 2 m. If a cable longer than 2 m is  
used, connect an external power supply to the bar code reader.  
Connector and Related Parts  
Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the  
connecting cable.  
Name  
Connector  
Model  
Remarks  
XM2A-0901  
XM2S-0911  
9-pin type, made by OMRON, PT side  
9-pin, made by OMRON  
Connector hood  
Cable  
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.  
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.  
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix H  
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer  
The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer.  
NT-CNT121 (made by OMRON, cable length 1.5 m, 20-pin – 36-pin)  
Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer.  
Connector pin arrangement and wiring  
Connector for a printer  
on PT side  
Printer  
side  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Abbr.  
1
8
3
6
Shielding wire  
1
11  
Connector hood  
Connector hood  
0V  
D7  
20  
9
1
11  
2
N.C.  
D6  
N.C.  
8
12  
3
D5  
7
0V  
21  
6
13  
4
D4  
N.C  
D3  
N.C.  
5
14  
5
2
0
1
0
0V  
22  
23  
4
15  
6
1
0V  
1
9
D2  
16  
7
N.C.  
D1  
N.C.  
3
17  
8
D0  
2
0V  
18  
9
24  
1
STROB  
N.C.  
BUSY  
0V  
19  
10  
20  
N.C.  
11  
19  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix I  
Relationship between System Program and  
Hardware  
Here, relationship between system program and hardware is described.  
NT31/NT31C have following models.  
NT31-ST121j -E  
Conventional product  
NT31C-ST141j -E  
NT31-ST121j -EV1  
NT31C-ST141j -EV1  
NT31-ST121j -EV2  
NT31C-ST141j -EV2  
Version upgrade model of the products above  
(12/98)  
Version upgrade model of the products above  
(12/99)  
System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state. Also, system pro-  
grams are supplied with the Support Tool as follows.  
System programs for NT31-ST121j-E/NT31C-ST141j-E: System Program Ver. 1.0  
j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV2/ZJCAT1-EV2)  
System programs for NT31-ST121j-EV1/NT31C-ST141j-EV1: System Program Ver. 2.0j or 2.1  
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV3/ZJCAT1-EV3)  
j
System programs for NT31-ST121j-EV2/NT31C-ST141j-EV2: System Program Ver. 3.0  
j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJCAT1-EV4)  
(A system program for the earlier NT30/620 PTs is also included with the NT-ZJCAT1-EV4.)  
These system programs have mutual compatibility, therefore, they can be installed and used for NT31-ST121j -E/  
NT31C-ST141j -E/NT31-ST121j-EV1/NT31C-ST141j-EV1/NT31-ST121j-EV2/NT31C-ST141j-EV2  
each.  
However, there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination. Refer to the following table.  
Limitations of System Program/PT Combinations  
The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program.  
For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool, refer to NT-series Support Tool  
for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).  
Combining a -V1 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix  
Hardware  
NT31-ST121j-E  
NT31-ST121j-EV1  
NT31C-ST141j-E  
NT31C-ST141j-EV1  
System program Ver. 1.0  
j
The following functions cannot be used  
The following functions cannot be used  
S Analogue meter  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Analogue meter  
High-definition font display  
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs  
Memory link  
S High-definition font display  
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs  
S Memory link  
S Window control from the host  
S Multiple display of window screens  
S Moving a window  
Window control from the host  
Multiple display of window screens  
Moving a window  
S
Refer to the following table for details on new  
functions supported by the -V2 versions.  
Refer to the following table for details on new  
functions supported by the -V2 versions.  
*
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
is possible  
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1  
j
The following functions cannot be used  
The new functions supported by the -V2 versions  
cannot be used. Refer to the following table for details.  
S
S
S
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
High-definition font display  
Refer to the following table for details on new  
functions supported by the -V2 versions.  
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relationship between System Program and Hardware  
Appendix I  
Combining a -V1 Version and -V2 Version  
Hardware  
NT31-ST121j-EV1  
NT31-ST121j-EV2  
NT31C-ST141j-EV2  
NT31C-ST141j-EV1  
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1  
j
The following functions (new functions supported by the -V2) cannot be used:  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs  
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link  
Interlock function that controls touch switches, numeral inputs, and character string inputs  
Mathematical function  
Device Monitor function  
NT30/620 compatible mode  
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character) displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF switching  
displays, numeral memory table displays, and character string memory table displays  
System program Ver. 3.0  
j
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used.  
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.  
Combining a -V2 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix  
Hardware  
NT31-ST121j-E  
NT31-ST121j-EV2  
NT31C-ST141j-E  
NT31C-ST141j-EV2  
System program Ver. 1.0  
j
The following functions cannot be used  
The following functions cannot be used  
S Analogue meter  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Analogue meter  
High-definition font display  
S High-definition font display  
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs  
S Memory link  
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs  
Memory link  
S Window control from the host  
S Multiple display of window screens  
S Moving a window  
Window control from the host  
Multiple display of window screens  
Moving a window  
S
S
S
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs  
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link  
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs  
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link  
Interlock function that controls touch switches,  
numeral inputs, and character string inputs  
Interlock function that controls touch switches,  
numeral inputs, and character string inputs  
S
S
S
S
Mathematical function  
S
S
S
S
Mathematical function  
Device Monitor function  
NT30/620 compatible mode  
Device Monitor function  
NT30/620 compatible mode  
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)  
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF  
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,  
and character string memory table displays  
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)  
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF  
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,  
and character string memory table displays  
*
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
is possible  
System program Ver. 3.0  
j
The following functions cannot be used  
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and  
Reference Manual can be used.  
S
S
Installation of system programs using memory unit  
High-definition font display  
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix J  
Model List  
PTs  
Model  
Specification  
NT31-ST121-EV2  
NT31-ST121B-EV2  
NT31C-ST141-EV2  
NT31C-ST141B-EV2  
STN monochrome display, ivory  
STN monochrome display, black  
STN color display, ivory  
STN color display, black  
Host Link Units  
Model  
Specification  
Applicable PC  
C-series  
C1000H  
C2000H  
C-series  
3G2A6-LK201-EV1  
3G2A6-LK202-EV1  
C200H-LK201-V1  
C200H-LK202-V1  
3G2A5-LK201-EV1  
C500-LK203  
CPU-mounted type with RS-232C connector  
CPU-mounted type with RS-422A connector  
Rack-mounting unit with RS-232C connector for C200H  
Rack-mounting unit with RS-422A connector for C200H  
Features a selectable RS-232C/RS-422A connector  
Rack-mounting unit for C500  
C200HS  
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E  
C-series  
C1000H  
C2000H  
CV500-LK201  
Features an RS-232C connector and a selectable  
RS-232C/RS-422A connector  
CVM1/CV-series  
CV500  
CV1000  
CV2000  
CVM1  
Rack-mounting unit for CVM1/CV  
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit  
Model  
Specification  
Model Name  
SRM1-C02-V2  
Features an RS-232C port  
SRM1  
Communications Unit  
Model  
Specification  
Applicable PC  
CS1W-SCU21  
RS-232C (2 ports)  
Rack-mounting unit  
CS1-series  
CS1G/H  
CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CPM1-10CDR-  
CPM1-20CDR-  
CPM1A-10CDj -  
CPM1A-20CDj -  
CPM1A-30CDj -  
CPM1A-40CDj -  
j
j
j
j
j
j
RS-232C adapter/RS-422A adapter connected to the  
peripheral port  
C-series  
CPM1  
CPM2A-30CD  
CPM2A-40CD  
CPM2A-60CD  
j j -  
j j -  
j j -  
j
j
j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
C-series  
CPM2A  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model List  
Appendix J  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -  
j -  
j
j
The PC’s communications connector can be split into  
an RS-232C port and peripheral port with a  
CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable. (The  
C-series  
CPM2C  
CPM2C-20  
j
CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cables convert the  
connector to a single RS-232C or peripheral port.)  
CQM1-CPU21-E  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
C-series  
CQM1  
CQM1-CPU41-EV1  
CQM1-CPU42-EV1  
CQM1-CPU43-EV1  
CQM1-CPU44-EV1  
CQM1-CPU45-EV1  
CQM1H-CPU11  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
(The CQM1H-CPU11-E has only a peripheral port.)  
C-series  
CQM1H  
C200HS-CPU21-E  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HS  
(*)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HE(-Z)E  
C-series  
C200HG(-Z)E  
(*)  
(*)  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
(*)  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HX(-Z)E  
(*)  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS1-series  
CS1G  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS1-series  
CS1H  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
CVM1/CV-series  
CV500  
CV1000  
CV2000  
CVM1  
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.  
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:1 NT Link  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CPM1-10CDR-  
CPM1-20CDR-  
CPM1A-10CDj -  
CPM1A-20CDj -  
CPM1A-30CDj -  
CPM1A-40CDj -  
j
j
j
j
j
j
RS-232C adapter connected to the peripheral port  
(RS-422A adapter cannot be used)  
C-series  
CPM1  
CPM2A-30CD  
CPM2A-40CD  
CPM2A-60CD  
j j -  
j j -  
j j -  
j
j
j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
C-series  
CPM2A  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model List  
Appendix J  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CPM2C-10  
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -  
j -  
j
j
Connect to the RS-232C port of a CPM2C-CN111  
Connecting Cable.  
C-series  
CPM2C  
C-series  
CQM1  
CPM2C-20  
j
CQM1-CPU41-EV1  
CQM1-CPU42-EV1  
CQM1-CPU43-EV1  
CQM1-CPU44-EV1  
CQM1-CPU45-EV1  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
CQM1H-CPU21  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
C-series  
CQM1H  
C200HS-CPU21-E  
C200HS-CPU23-E  
C200HS-CPU31-E  
C200HS-CPU33-E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HS  
(*)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HE(-Z)E  
C-series  
C200HG(-Z)E  
(*)  
(*)  
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
(*)  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
C-series  
C200HX(-Z)E  
(*)  
CV500-CPU01-EV1  
CV1000-CPU01-EV1  
CV2000-CPU01-EV1  
CVM1-CPU01-EV2  
CVM1-CPU11-EV2  
CVM1-CPU21-EV2  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections  
(selectable/9-pin)  
CVM1/CV-series  
CV500  
CV1000  
CV2000  
CVM1  
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.  
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:N NT Link  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
(*1)  
(*1)  
CQM1H-CPU51  
CQM1H-CPU61  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
C-series  
CQM1H  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series  
C200HE(-Z)E  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series  
C200HG(-Z)E  
(*)  
(*)  
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E  
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E  
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E  
(*)  
(*)  
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E  
C200HX-CPU65-ZE  
C200HX-CPU85-ZE  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series  
C200HX(-Z)E  
(*)  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model List  
Appendix J  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)  
CS1-series  
CS1G  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)  
CS1-series  
CS1H  
*1: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.  
*2: Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.  
CPU Units for Connection via a High-speed NT Link (1:N))  
Model  
Specification  
PC Type  
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)  
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
CS1-series  
CS1G  
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)  
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)  
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections  
CS1-series  
CS1H  
Reference: Serial Communications Boards (CS1W-SCB41) and Serial Communications Units (CS1W-SCU21)  
with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units  
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used to establish a high-speed 1:N NT Link.  
RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit  
Model  
Specification  
RS-232C: 9-pin connector  
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block  
NT-AL001  
RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor  
Model  
Specification  
CPM1-CIF01  
CPM1-CIF11  
Links the RS-232C port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,  
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link, and NT Link (1:1))  
Links the RS-422A port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,  
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link)  
Related Parts and Equipment for PT  
Name  
Model  
Remark  
Support Tool*  
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers  
For Windows 95/98/NT (English version)  
CD-ROM  
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4  
Options  
NT31C-CFL01  
NT30-KBA04  
NT30-KBA01  
NT-MF261  
Replaceable backlight (common to NT31 and NT31C)  
Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT31/NT31C  
Chemical-resistant cover for NT31/NT31C  
Memory unit for NT31/NT31C  
3G2A9-BAT08  
Spare battery  
* The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs (Ver. 3.0) for the  
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. System programs for the earlier NT30/620 PTs are also included.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model List  
Appendix J  
Cables with Connectors for PT PC/NT-AL001-E  
Model  
XW2Z-200S  
XW2Z-500S  
XW2Z-200T  
XW2Z-500T  
XW2Z-200P  
XW2Z-500P  
XW2Z-200S  
XW2Z-500S  
SJ45007-102  
Cable Length  
Applicable units  
Communication Method  
Specification  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
2 m  
5 m  
1 m  
Host link units with a 25-pin  
connector  
Serial port A host link  
(RS-232C only)  
9-pin 25-pin  
Host link units with a 9-pin  
connector  
Serial port A host link, NT Link  
(1:1) (RS-232C only)  
9-pin 9-pin  
25-pin 25-pin  
25-pin 9-pin  
Host link units with a 25-pin  
connector  
Serial port B host link  
(RS-232C only)  
Host link units with a 9-pin  
connector  
Serial port B host link, NT Link  
(1:1) (RS-232C only)  
CPU Units with a 9-pin  
Host Link or 1:1 NT Link using  
NT-AL001-E  
connector (A +5 V power  
supply wire is attached for  
NT-AL001-E connections.)  
9-pin 9-pin  
9-pin 9-pin  
9-pin 9-pin  
SJ45007-202  
XW2Z-070T-1  
XW2Z-200T-1  
SJ46006-102  
SJ46006-202  
2 m  
0.7 m  
2 m  
CPU Units with a 9-pin  
Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N  
(*1)  
connector (The PC  
+5 V for NT-AL001-E  
connections.)  
supplies NT Link using NT-AL001-E  
1 m  
CPU Units with a 9-pin  
Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N  
(*1)  
connector (The PC  
supplies NT Link using NT-AL001-E  
+5 V for NT-AL001-E  
connections.)  
2 m  
*1: The following PCs can supply +5 V: C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, CPM2A, CPM2C, and CS1G/H.  
Cables with Connectors  
Model  
CV500-CN228  
Cable Length  
2 m  
Specification  
25-pin (male) 9-pin (male)  
25-pin (female) 14-pin (male)  
9-pin (female) 9-pin (male)  
*
XW2Z-S001  
XW2Z-S002  
15 cm  
2 m  
* The XW2Z-S001 is a converting cable. A CV500-CN228 must be purchased separately for connection to a computer.  
Connection Cable  
Model  
Specification  
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.  
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.  
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB  
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG  
Applicable Connectors  
Name  
Model  
Specification  
25-pin type (male), made by OMRON  
Connector  
XM2A-2501  
XM2D-2501  
XM2A-0901  
XM2D-0901  
DB-25P  
25-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)  
9-pin type (male), made by OMRON  
9-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)  
25-pin type (male), made by JAE  
Connector hood  
XM2S-2511  
XM2S-2513  
XM2S-0911  
25-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON  
25-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON  
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON  
XM2S-0911-E 9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON  
XM2S-0913  
DB-C2-J9  
9-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON  
25-pin type, made by JAE  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model List  
Appendix J  
Printer Cable  
Model  
Specification  
NT-CNT121  
Printer cable for half pitch (1.5 m), made by OMRON  
Cable for Peripheral Port of CS1-series PC  
Model  
CS1W-CN118  
Specification  
Made by OMRON (CS1-series peripheral port D-Sub, 9-pin, female)  
Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector  
Model  
CPM2C-CN111  
Specification  
Made by OMRON (CPM2C communications port D-Sub, 9-pin, female, C-series  
peripheral port)  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix K  
Option List  
Replaceable Backlight ... NT31C-CFL01 (Used for Both NT31/NT31C)  
This is a backlight (CFL unit) for replacement purposes.  
Protective Sheet ... NT30-KBA04 (Used for Both NT31/NT31C)  
Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.  
The five sheets make a set.  
Chemical-resistant Cover ... NT30-KBA01  
Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of  
silicone rubber.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option List  
Appendix K  
The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents.  
Protects against  
Does not protect against  
Hexane  
Boric acid  
Sulfuric acid  
Nitrogen  
Lubricating oil  
Benzene  
Ammonia gas  
Carbonic acid gas  
Phenol  
Butane  
Carbonic acid  
Chlorinated solvents  
Napthalene  
Soy bean oil  
Toluene  
Glycerin  
Ammonia water  
Calcium chloride  
Developing fluid (hypo)  
Acetaldehyde  
Lard  
For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above, please inquire whether or not protection is offered  
(if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection, please use this  
product even if the agent is not listed in the “Protects against” column of the table above).  
Replacement Battery ... 3G2A9-BAT08  
This is a lithium battery used for memory backup.  
Memory Unit ... NT-MF261  
This is a dedicated unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT31/NT31C. Data is  
transmitted by DIP switch setting at the memory unit.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Chemical-resistant cover, 283  
Numbers  
1:N connection among RS-422A ports, 122  
Cleaning method, 245  
Clearing screen data, 140, 154  
1:N connection among RS-485 ports, 125  
Clearing/installing the system program, 151  
Comm. A Method, 158  
1:N connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT31/NT31C and  
RS-232C at the host, 92  
Comm. B Method, 158  
Comm. B Select, 158  
Communication board, 55, 68, 72, 75, 102  
Communication boards, 111  
A
Allowable power supply voltage range, 247  
Communication by Using Memory Link, 20  
Communication condition, 157  
Communication condition settings for bar code readers, 188  
Applicable connectors, 281  
Automatic transmission (memory unit), 42, 49  
Communication condition settings for the host link method,  
158  
B
Communication errors and their remedies, 239  
Communication method for communications with the host, 157  
Communication method settings, 158  
Communication methods, 26  
Backlight, 241  
Backlight brightness adjustment, 193  
Backlight unit, 30  
Battery cover, 30  
Communication port, 26  
Before operating, 22  
Brightness adjustment, 248  
Communication type, 26  
Communication Unit, 277  
Communications specifications, 251  
Comparison between NT31 and NT31C, 5  
Connecting a bar code reader, 37  
Connecting a printer, 36  
C
Cable connection dimensions, 257  
Cable for peripheral port of CS1-series PLC, 282  
Cables with connectors, 281  
Connecting directly between RS-232C ports, 79  
Connecting to other model PCs, 20  
Connecting to the Support Tool, 35  
Connection cable, 281  
Calling the System Installer mode, 138  
Calling the System Menu, 138  
Connection method, 26  
Cell size (Touch panel), 248  
Contrast adjustment, 191  
Changing the system settings, 153  
Checking communication at serial ports, 217  
Checking communication with a printer, 220  
Checking communication with the support tool, 216  
Checking interfaces, 215  
CPU, 102  
CPUs, 68, 72, 75, 111, 113  
CPUs (for connection via a host link), 277  
CPUs connectable with host link units or expansion commu-  
nication board, 102  
Checking screen data, 202  
Checking the backlight, 209  
D
Checking the battery voltage, 214  
Checking the buzzer, 205  
Device check, 205  
Checking the LCD (screen display), 208  
Checking the PT setting status, 197  
Checking the RUN LED, 206  
Device Monitor function, 227  
Dimensions, 247  
Direct connection function, 17  
Disabling/enabling System Menu display, 153  
Checking touch switches, 212  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory, 153  
Display, 29  
Installation environment, 32  
Installation in the operation panel, 32  
Display color, 248  
Display device, 248  
L–M  
Display specifications, 248  
Life expectancy (backlight), 248  
Life expectancy (display panel), 248  
Life expectancy (touch panel), 248  
Maintenance Mode, 136  
Displaying and printing the display history record, 198  
Displaying/setting the calendar and clock, 195  
Downloading the system program, 152  
Making the cable, 267  
E
Making the cable for connecting a PC, 269  
Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader, 271  
Making the cable for connection to a printer, 273  
Manual transmission (memory unit), 44, 50  
Manuals, 22  
Effective display area, 248  
Enclosure ratings, 247  
Error messages, 235  
Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies, 239  
Errors occurring at start of operation, 235  
Errors occurring during operation, 237  
Memory initialization, 140  
Memory link method, 78, 116  
Memory switch, 157  
Errors occurring on screen data initialization and transmission,  
238  
Memory switch setting screen, 168  
Memory unit, 284  
Errors when using a memory unit, 45, 51  
Expansion interface connector, 30  
Expansion Mode, 136  
Menu tree, 137  
RUN mode, 135  
External interface specifications, 249  
System Installer Mode, 135  
Mounting dimensions, 256  
F–H  
Functional ground terminal, 34  
General specifications, 247  
GR terminal, 30  
N
Noise resistance, 247  
NT link, 18  
Grounding, 34, 247  
NT link (1:1) method, 67  
Host link, 18  
NT link (1:N) method, 72, 113  
high-speed, 75, 115  
Host link method, 54, 101  
Host link unit, 55, 277  
NT-AL001, 259  
Number of dots, 248  
Number of switches (touch panel), 248  
I
I/O settings, 191  
O
In the panel, 4  
Initializing alarm history record data, 144  
Initializing display history record data, 142  
Initializing the memory switches, 149  
Initializing the memory tables, 147  
Initializing the recipe tables, 145  
Inspection method, 245  
Operating ambient humidity, 247  
Operating ambient temperature, 247  
Operating environment, 247  
Operating force, 248  
Operation at startup, 134  
Operation modes, 135  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Serial port B, 17, 26  
P
Serial port B connector, 30  
Peripheral devices that can be connected, 16  
Power consumption, 247  
Power input terminals, 30  
POWER LED, 29  
Set, 161  
Setting “Screen Saver Movement”, 175  
Setting the automatic reset function, 183  
Setting the bar code reader input function, 188  
Setting the ”Buzzer Sound”, 171  
Setting the communication type for serial port B, 167  
Power supply connection, 33  
precautions, xi  
Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen data, 156  
Principal functions of NT31/NT31C, 9  
Printer cable, 282  
Setting the conditions for communications with the memory  
link method, 158  
Setting the display language in the System Installer mode, 151  
Setting the history display method, 179  
Setting the host link method, 160  
Setting the “Key Press Sound”, 170  
Setting the Memory Link Method, 165  
Setting the NT link (1:1) method, 162  
Setting the NT link (1:N) method, 163  
Setting the “Print Method”, 174  
Setting the “Printer Controller”, 172  
Setting the resume function, 181  
Setting the retry count, 186  
Printer connector, 30  
Programming console function, 221  
Programming environment, 249  
Protective sheet, 283  
PT, 277  
PT Memory, 20  
R
Rated power supply voltage, 247  
Setting the screen saver start-up time, 177  
Setting the ”Start-up Wait Time”, 169  
Setting the terminal resistance, 99, 128  
Setting the time-out interval, 185  
Shock resistance (operating), 247  
Special features, 249  
Recipe function, 6  
Recommended printers, 36  
Relationship between system program and hardware, 275  
Relationships among modes, 135  
Replaceable backlight, 283  
Replacement battery, 284  
Replacing the backlight, 242  
Replacing the battery, 244  
Reset switch, 30  
Starting operation, 168  
Starting the NT31/NT31C, 134  
Storage ambient temperature, 247  
Supplemental functions to V2, 6  
Support Tool, 280  
RS-232C adaptor, 280  
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, 88, 280  
RS-422A adaptor, 280  
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode, 139  
Switching to the RUN mode, 168  
System configuration, 16  
RUN, 135  
RUN LED, 29  
System Menu, 135  
S
T–U  
Screen data composition and transmission units, 155  
Screen data memory check, 209  
Selecting menu items, 139  
Terminal resistance setting terminal , 99  
Transmit Mode, 136  
Transmitting the screen data, 155  
Serial communication board, 54, 72, 75, 102, 116  
Serial communication unit, 54  
Transporting and storing the NT31/NT31C, 265  
Usable systems (programming console function), 221  
Using a Memory Unit(NT31/NT31C with V1), 39  
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, 259  
Serial port A, 17, 26  
Serial port A connector, 30  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
V
W
Warning label, 30  
Waterproofed, 4  
Weight, 247  
Vibration resistance (operating), 247  
View angle, 248  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.  
Cat. No. V062-E1-02  
Revision code  
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the  
previous version.  
Revision code  
Date  
Revised content  
1
July 2000  
Original production  
02  
January 2003  
Page 73: Description on connections added under Connecting to CS1-series  
CPU Units.  
Page 185: Setting range of 0 to 10 seconds corrected to 1 to 10 seconds un-  
der Setting the Time-out Interval and 00” deleted from the sequence in the  
bottom graphic.  
Page 224: Description on error display under Reference changed.  
Page 235: One row about the numeral display or numeral input field added to  
the table.  
Page 269: Indications inside connector graphics corrected and a note about  
the use of shielding wire added to each graphic.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OMRON Corporation  
FA Systems Division H.Q.  
66 Matsumoto  
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511  
Japan  
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045  
Regional Headquarters  
OMRON EUROPE B.V.  
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp  
The Netherlands  
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388  
OMRON ELECTRONICS, INC.  
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173  
U.S.A.  
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568  
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.  
83 Clemenceau Avenue,  
#11-01, UE Square,  
Singapore 239920  
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authorized Distributor:  
Printed in Japan  
Cat. No. V062-E1-02  
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miller Electric Welding System Welder Generator User Manual
Milwaukee Impact Driver 2653 20 User Manual
Nextar MP3 Player MA566 User Manual
Olympus Camcorder LS 20M User Manual
Omega Beverage Dispenser B2100 User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector W304M User Manual
Oregon Scientific Scale GR101 User Manual
Oricom Cordless Telephone eco5100 Series User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera AK HBU931P User Manual
Panasonic Vacuum Cleaner MC UG371 User Manual